JP7107408B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine comprising a first transmission means and a second transmission means meshing with the first transmission means and transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first transmission means via the meshing . There is a gaming machine (Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-110376 A

However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of making the engagement between the first transmission means and the second transmission means suitable .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of favorably engaging the first transmission means and the second transmission means .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises moving means formed to be movable, driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and driving generated by the driving means. transmission means for transmitting force to the moving means, the transmission means having teeth at least in part and being connected to the moving means; a second transmission means having at least a portion of teeth meshable with the teeth; and a connection means connected to the second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the second transmission means, The connecting means is formed with teeth continuous with the teeth of the second transmission means, the connecting means is formed with the continuous teeth on one side, and the other side opposite to the one side is the connecting means. The continuous tooth is formed on the entire surface of the coupling means in the axial direction, and the game machine is pivotally supported by the first transmission means and the second transmission means. A base member is provided .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the engagement between the first transmission means and the second transmission means can be favorably achieved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front schematic diagram of a game board. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front perspective view of a rotary operation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation operation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary motion unit when the rotary motion unit is disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary motion unit when the rotary motion unit is disassembled and viewed from the front; (a) is a front view of a case body, and (b) is a front view of a fixing member. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the support structure by the case body of a 1st gearwheel, a 2nd gearwheel, and a 3rd gearwheel. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit in which the compound action unit is viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the compound action unit in a partially exploded state; It is a front perspective view of the first opening/closing gear, the second opening/closing gear, the first rotating gear, and the second rotating gear. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged front view of the compound action unit explaining in chronological order the process of assembling the opening/closing first gear, the opening/closing second gear, the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear to the first shaft and the second shaft; FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged front view of the compound action unit explaining in chronological order the process of assembling the opening/closing first gear, the opening/closing second gear, the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear to the first shaft and the second shaft; FIG. 11 is an exploded front view of the compound action unit for explaining relative displacement states of the opening/closing second gear and the slide rack member with respect to the back arm body; FIG. 10 is a front view of the compound motion unit showing opening/closing motion and rotating motion of the motion member in chronological order; FIG. 4 is a schematic front view of the compound action unit, schematically illustrating a meshing state between the first opening/closing gear and the second opening/closing gear, and a meshing state between the first rotation gear and the second rotation gear. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view of the compound action unit, schematically illustrating a meshing state between the first opening/closing gear and the second opening/closing gear, and a meshing state between the first rotation gear and the second rotation gear. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view of the compound action unit, schematically illustrating a meshing state between the first opening/closing gear and the second opening/closing gear, and a meshing state between the first rotation gear and the second rotation gear. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit and the second coupling operation unit in a state where the first engaging member and the pair of second coupling members are arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit and the second coupling operation unit in a state where the first engaging member and the pair of second coupling members are arranged at the coupling position; 33(a) is a front view of the first joint operation unit, and (b) is a bottom view of the first joint operation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 33(a). FIG. Fig. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the first joint operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first joint operation unit; It is a rear view of a drive part. (a) is a front perspective view of a slide mechanism, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism. It is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism part which viewed the disassembled slide mechanism part from the front. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism section in which the disassembled slide mechanism section is viewed from the rear; (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit with the first coupling member arranged at the retracted position; (b) is a front view of the first coupling unit with the first coupling member arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the operating unit; (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit with the first coupling member arranged at the coupling position; (b) is a first coupling with the first coupling member arranged at the coupling position; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the operating unit; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of a second coupling motion unit; (a) is a front view of a second joint operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second joint operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of a second joint operation unit; FIG. 4 is a front view model diagram of the first coupling operation unit and the second coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member and the pair of second coupling members are arranged at the coupling position; FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the annular motion unit in a state in which the annular ring forming member is arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the torus motion unit with the torus forming member arranged at the coupled position; FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the annular motion unit in which the exploded annular motion unit is viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the annular motion unit in which the exploded annular motion unit is viewed from the rear; (a) is a front perspective view of a link member, (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member, and (c) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member in part Lc of FIG. 50(a). and (d) is a side view of the link member as viewed in the direction of arrow Ld in FIG. 50(a). FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged rear view of the ring motion unit; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the circular motion unit, schematically illustrating the circular motion unit in which the pair of circular ring forming members are arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 53 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LIII-LIII in FIG. 52; FIG. 10 is a rear schematic view of the annular motion unit, schematically illustrating the annular motion unit in which a pair of annular ring forming members are arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position; FIG. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 54; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the annular motion unit, schematically illustrating the annular motion unit in which a pair of annular ring forming members are arranged at coupling positions; FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56; FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit in a state where the arm member is extended to the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 800 with the arm member 820 retracted to the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit in a state in which the arm member is retracted to the retracted position; FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking motion unit in which the rocking motion unit that has been disassembled is viewed from the front; 61(a) is a rear view of the swinging motion unit with the arm member disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swinging motion unit in part LXIb of FIG. 61(a). be. (a) is a rear view of the rocking motion unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking motion unit in part LXIIb of FIG. 62(a). (a) is a rear view of the rocking motion unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking motion unit in part LXIIIb of FIG. 63(a). (a) is a rear view of the rocking motion unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking motion unit in part LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). FIG. 10 is a top view of an intermediate case body, a rear case body, and a front case body in an assembled state according to the second embodiment; FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate case body, the rear case body and the front case body taken along line LXVI-LXVI of FIG. 65; (a) is a side view of a link member, and (b) is a top view of an intermediate case body, a rear case body, and a front case body in an assembled state. It is a back perspective view of a raising/lowering base body. FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the circular motion unit, schematically illustrating the circular motion unit in which the pair of circular ring forming members are arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 70 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LXX-LXX in FIG. 69; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the annular motion unit, schematically illustrating the annular motion unit in which a pair of annular ring forming members are arranged at coupling positions; FIG. 72 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LXXI-LXXI of FIG. 71; (a) is a side view of a link member in a third embodiment, and (b) is a top view of an intermediate case body, a rear case body, and a front case body in an assembled state. FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an annular motion unit in which a pair of annular ring forming members are arranged at coupling positions; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a first joint operation unit in the fourth embodiment; (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit with the first coupling member arranged at the retracted position; (b) is a front view of the first coupling unit with the first coupling member arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the operating unit; (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit with the first coupling member arranged at the coupling position; (b) is a first coupling with the first coupling member arranged at the coupling position; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the operating unit; FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of a first joint operation unit in the fifth embodiment; (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit with the first coupling member arranged at the retracted position; (b) is a front view of the first coupling unit with the first coupling member arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the operating unit; (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit with the first coupling member arranged at the coupling position; (b) is a first coupling with the first coupling member arranged at the coupling position; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the operating unit; FIG. 20 is an exploded rear perspective view of a first joint operation unit in the sixth embodiment; (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit with the first coupling member arranged at the retracted position; (b) is a front view of the first coupling unit with the first coupling member arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the operating unit; (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit with the first coupling member arranged at the coupling position; (b) is a first coupling with the first coupling member arranged at the coupling position; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the operating unit; (a) to (c) are exploded perspective views of a compound action unit in a seventh embodiment, (a) to (c) are exploded perspective views of a compound action unit according to an eighth embodiment. (a) to (c) are exploded perspective views of a compound action unit according to a ninth embodiment. 87(a) is a front view of the first coupling member in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a bottom view of the first coupling member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a). FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 87(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 87(a); 88(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member taken along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc of FIG. 88(a). (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the second coupling operation unit, and (b) is a top view of the second coupling member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member taken along line XCa-XCa of FIG. 89(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member taken along line XCb-XCb of FIG. 90(a). be. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a first coupling member and a second coupling member in a state of being arranged at a coupling position.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball while the pressing operation is being performed, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal mode by the lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows some of the balls launched to the game board that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular first specific prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center thereof. In addition, a second variable prize winning device 650 is arranged on the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64, and has a circular shape of about the same size as the other prize winning ports 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. A second specific prize winning port 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the normally closed specific winning holes 65a and 650a are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific prize winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid ( not shown). The first specific prize winning port 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the front lower side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the first specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal state. The closed state and the state of the closed state are alternately repeated.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 includes a guide path that guides the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a, and an opening that is the opposite side of the guide path from the second specific winning opening 650a side. 651, a driving accessory 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the driving accessory 650b to open and close in the horizontal direction around the lower side of the opening 651. and The second specific prize winning port 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state at the time.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area. Triggered by a ball entering the specific winning openings 65a and 650a while the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are open, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which the game is opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a and 650a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the first winning hole 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 and a second outlet 72 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a pass through the first out hole 71 or the second out hole 72 and are discharged. guided to the road. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, while the second out port 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific prize winning port 650a. That is, the second out port 72 is provided on the opposite side of the first out port 71 with the second specific winning port 650a interposed therebetween.

Therefore, the ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) on the right side of the second specific winning opening 650a (right side in FIG. 2) is the inner rail 61 or along the slope of the outer edge member 73 and guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61 ) flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 72 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 340 , 430 , 522 , 640 , 740 , 830 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the layout (arrangement) of each component such as the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the out ports 71, 72 on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 5, each configuration such as the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is schematically illustrated, and a part of the game board 13 is partially enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the front view of the game area, the inner rail 61 has a portion arranged on the lower right side (a portion on the right side of the first out port 71) that extends linearly and extends in the first direction. It is formed so as to be inclined upward in a direction away from the 1-out port 71 .

Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, an outer edge member 73 made of resin is arranged to define the outer edge of the game area together with the rails 61 and 62. be. The outer edge member 73 includes an arcuate wall portion 73a formed by providing an arcuate wall surface extending from the outer rail 62 on the inner surface side, and an arcuate wall portion 73a continuously provided below the arcuate wall portion 73a in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). A vertical wall portion 73b formed by providing a wall surface extending linearly along the inner rail 73b on the inner surface side, and a vertical wall portion 73b connected to the lower side of the vertical wall portion 73b and extending linearly while being inclined downward toward the inner rail 61. and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with the wall surface provided on the inner surface side.

In this way, the game area defined by the inner rail 61, the outer rail 62, and the outer edge member 73 has a substantially circular part (lower right part in FIG. 5) formed in a substantially rectangular shape and expanded outward. shape. Specifically, the area defined by the linear portion of the inner rail 61 disposed on the right side of the first outlet 71 and the inclined wall portion 73c and the vertical wall portion 73b of the outer edge member 73 is substantially rectangular. formed in

As a result, compared to the case where the game area is formed in a substantially circular shape by extending the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, the substantially rectangular area (lower right part in FIG. 5) is provided, and the entire game area The area can be expanded. Therefore, the expanded area is used as a space for disposing the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, etc. Alternatively, the space can be utilized as a space for forming a path for the ball to flow down, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in arranging the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the path for the ball to flow down. As a result, the position of the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 can be lowered downward (downward in FIG. 5), so that the size of the third pattern display device 81 can be increased accordingly.

That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, below the third symbol display device 81, the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640 and the variable prize winning device 65 are arranged in series along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). was Therefore, the space required under the third pattern display device 81 is bulky in the vertical direction, which hinders the enlargement of the third pattern display device 81 .

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the enlarged portion of the game area (substantially rectangular area, lower right portion in FIG. 5) is used to form an arrangement space such as a prize winning opening or a flow-down path for balls. Can be used as space. Specifically, in this embodiment, the second winning hole 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged not directly under the first winning hole 64 but in the enlarged portion of the game area described above. Therefore, the position of the first winning hole 64 can be lowered accordingly, so that the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, according to the gaming machine 13 of the present embodiment, the second specific prize winning port 650a is not located directly below the first prize winning port 64, but is located on one side of the game area in the width direction (variable prize winning device) with respect to the first prize winning port 64. 65, the left side of FIG. 5), and the position where it abuts on the inner rail 61 (lower edge of the game area) (that is, the ball cannot pass between the second specific winning opening 650a and the inner rail 61 position). Therefore, the position of the first winning hole 64 can be lowered accordingly, so that the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

In this case, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, by providing two paths (the first out port 71 and the second out port 72) for discharging the ball from the game area to the ball discharge path, the second Further enlargement of the three-symbol display device 81 is possible.

That is, in order to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, so it is necessary to lower the position of the winning opening accordingly. For example, when the position of the first prize winning port 64 is lowered, a guide plate member 74 (a ball that is hit rightward (a ball that has passed the right side of the variable display unit 80)) is guided to the second specific prize winning port 650a. ) also needs to be lowered in order to secure a space for the ball to flow down between it and the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the position of the second specific winning opening 650a also needs to be lowered.

However, if the position of the second specific prize winning port 650a is lowered too much, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the ball to flow down below the second specific prize winning port 650a (between the inner rail 61). In other words, the ball that has flowed down without winning the winning hole cannot be ejected from the out hole provided below the first winning hole 64 . Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the second specific winning hole 650a, which is a factor that prevents the third symbol display device 81 from being sufficiently enlarged.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the first out port 71, the second out port 72 sandwiches the second specific winning port 650a. (that is, the first out port 71 and the second out port 72 are disposed on the right and left sides of the second specific winning port 650a, respectively), so the ball flowing down the game area In addition, the ball that reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side of the second specific winning opening 650a (right side in FIG. 5) While it can be discharged to the ball discharge path by the first out port 71, the ball that reaches the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the second specific winning port 650a in front view It can flow down along the slope (curve) and be discharged from the second out port 72 to the ball discharge path.

Thus, by providing paths for discharging balls from the game area to the ball discharge path at two locations (first out port 71 and second out port 72), the lower part of the second specific winning port 650a (inner rail 61), it is unnecessary to secure a space for the ball to flow down. Therefore, since the position of the second specific prize winning port 650a can be further lowered (brought closer to or connected to the inner rail 61), the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered accordingly. , the position of the first winning hole 64 can be lowered, so that the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased accordingly.

In the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 640 and the first specific winning opening 65a are offset to the right side of the board surface, and the second specific winning opening 650a is offset to the left side of the board surface and close to the inner rail 61. By arranging (or in contact with) the rotation operation unit 300, the performance by the rotation operation unit 300 can be performed more effectively.

That is, when the player hits to the right, the player pays attention only to the right side of the board where the ball flows down. The flow is rarely noticed by players. In this case, in this embodiment, among the balls that have passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the balls that have passed through the upper side of the second winning opening 640 from right to left pass through the upper side of the guide plate member 74, It flows down toward the 2nd special prize-winning mouth 650a. Therefore, even if the second prize-winning port 640 is not won, there is an opportunity to win the second specific prize-winning port 650a. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the ball that has passed over the winning opening 640 from right to left (or make the player look at it). As a result, the player's line of sight can also be directed to the center of the board below the variable display unit 80 . As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the rotary motion unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the first winning port 64, and the rotary motion unit 300 is visible through the game board 13 (through the game board 13). Therefore, when the ball that did not win the second prize winning port 640 flows down toward the second specific prize winning port 650a, the player can also visually recognize the effect by the rotation operation unit 300, and such a rotation operation The production effect of the unit 300 can be enhanced.

As described above, the game board 13 has the base plate 60 made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the rotating operation unit 300 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 is visible from the front side to the player. is allowed. Here, the rotary operation unit 300 is a device that is operated when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 or when the result of a lottery resulting from a prize is won. It is arranged at a position corresponding to the 1 winning opening 64 .

Therefore, for a player who follows the ball flowing down toward the first prize winning port 64 with his eyes, especially when the ball wins the first prize winning port 64, a rotating operation is performed behind the first prize winning port 64. Since the effect by the unit 300 can be visually recognized, the effect associated with the winning of the ball into the first winning hole 64 can be effectively performed. A detailed configuration of the rotation operation unit 300 will be described later.

In this case, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are offset in the horizontal direction (the width direction of the game area, the right direction in FIG. 5) with respect to the first winning opening 64. , the positions of the first winning port 64 and the rotary motion unit 300 can be lowered downward (lower side in FIG. 5), and as a result, the rotary motion unit 300 can be moved to the position corresponding to the first winning port 64 and the game board 13 Even if it is arranged on the back side of (the base plate 60), the size of the third pattern display device 81 can be increased.

That is, when the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640 and the first variable prize winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction as in the conventional pachinko machine, the position corresponding to the first prize winning port 64 3, disposing the rotary operation unit 300 on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) interferes with the rotary operation unit 300, the second winning port 640, and the first variable winning device 65. The space required for disposing the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 increases in the vertical direction, which hinders the enlargement of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 move in the horizontal direction with respect to the first winning port 64. Since they are offset (in the width direction of the game area), interference between the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be avoided. Accordingly, the position of the first prize winning port 64 can be lowered, and the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

In particular, the first variable prize winning device 65 is offset to the right by using the substantially rectangular enlarged area on the lower right side of the game area. With respect to the prize winning device 650, since the second outlet 72 is provided in addition to the first outlet 71, the position thereof can be lowered without considering securing the space below for the ball to flow down. can. As a result, a larger space for disposing the rotary motion unit 300 can be secured, so that the contradictory problem of the enlargement of the third pattern display device 81 and the enlargement of the rotary motion unit 300 can be solved. As a result, both the presentation effect by the third pattern display device 81 and the presentation effect by the rotating operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

Here, the rotating operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape that can rotate around the first winning hole 64 . As a result, the entire periphery surrounding the first prize winning opening 64 can be used as an area for presentation. That is, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the performance by the rotary operation unit 300 on the back side of the first winning hole 64 . Therefore, when the effect is started with the winning of the first prize hole 64 as a trigger, the effect is performed in the area centered on the first prize hole 64 where the ball enters, and the first prize hole 64 It is possible to enhance the production effect of the production associated with winning a prize.

Further, when the state of the rotary operation unit 300 (for example, the rotational position or the lighting state) becomes a predetermined state, when the player starts winning the ball into the first winning hole 64, A game ball can be entered toward the center of an object (rotary motion unit 300 in a predetermined state) visually recognized by a player, and the performance effect of the rotating motion unit 300 can be enhanced. .

Furthermore, by forming the rotary motion unit 300 in a substantially circular shape, the space around the rotary motion unit 300 can be effectively used, and the space for arranging other prize-winning ports can be efficiently used. can be secured to In particular, the installation space for the second variable winning device 650 can be efficiently secured. That is, the first variable prize winning device 65 can be offset to the right with respect to the first prize winning port 64 by using the substantially rectangular enlarged area on the lower right side of the game area. While it is relatively easy to secure the second variable prize winning device 650, it is difficult to secure a sufficient amount of offset to the left with respect to the first prize winning port 64 because the inner rail 61 is curved in an arc shape. Become. In this case, since the rotary motion unit 300 is substantially circular, the space for disposing the second variable prize winning device 650 is effectively spaced between the inner rail 61 and the lower left side of the rotary motion unit 300 . can be guaranteed.

In addition, since the rotary motion unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape centering on the first winning hole 64, the rotary motion unit 300 can be arranged substantially in the center of the game area in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 5). can. That is, the center of the rotary motion unit 300 can be placed on the virtual line where the distance between the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 and the inner rail 61 (vertical distance in FIG. 5) is maximum. Therefore, the limited space of the game area can be effectively utilized while the size of the third symbol display device 81 is increased. The size of the unit 300 can also be increased efficiently.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning port 640 is not located directly below the first winning port 64, but on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port 64 (on the side of the first variable winning device 65). , right side of FIG. 5). In this case, the second winning opening 640 is arranged in such a manner that the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (first variable winning device 65 side, right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a space above the second winning port 640 for the ball to flow down in order to win the second winning port 640. can be lowered downwards. As a result, the size of the third pattern display device 81 can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second specific winning opening 650a is not located directly under the first winning opening 64, but is located on one side of the game area in the width direction (first variable winning opening) with respect to the first winning opening 64. It is arranged offset on the side opposite to the device 65 (left side in FIG. 5). In this case, the second specific winning opening 650a is disposed in such a posture that the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (first variable winning device 65 side, right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a space above the second specific winning port 650a for the ball to flow down for winning the second specific winning port 650a, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced accordingly. position can be lowered. As a result, the size of the third pattern display device 81 can be increased.

That is, when the opening 641 of the second winning opening 640 and the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged in a posture facing the upper side of the game area (upper side in FIG. 5), a space for making the ball flow down is provided. It is necessary to secure right above the openings 641 and 651, and the position of the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 needs to be raised accordingly, which hinders the enlargement of the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side of the game area in the width direction as in the present embodiment, the space for letting the balls flow down is diagonally above the openings 641 and 651 (upper right in FIG. 5). , and the position of the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the size of the third pattern display device 81 can be increased.

In this way, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the electric accessories 640a and 650b are positioned not directly above the second winning opening 640 and the second specific winning opening 650a, but in the second opening. It can be arranged on the side of the prize winning port 640 and the second specific prize winning port 650a. In other words, it is not necessary to secure the arrangement space for the electric accessories 640a and 650b directly above the second prize winning port 640 and the second specific prize winning port 650a. can be lowered to As a result, the size of the third pattern display device 81 can be further increased.

Furthermore, since the openings 641, 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is not necessary to provide a pair of electric accessories 640a, 650b for opening and closing the openings 641, 651, and only one side is provided. be able to. As a result, the capacity required for driving means (for example, solenoids) for driving the electric accessories 640a and 650b can be reduced in size, and the cost of parts can be reduced. At the same time, energy consumption can be suppressed.

In addition, since the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the difficulty of winning the second winning opening 640 from being excessively lowered. That is, in the present embodiment, since the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, the space for arranging the winning openings and the like is limited. The interval becomes narrower. Therefore, compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640 and the first variable prize winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, the difficulty of entering the ball into the second prize winning port 640 is increased. There is a possibility that it will decrease and impair the playability. Therefore, by forming the opening 641 so as to face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning from directly above the second winning opening 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. Only in the second winning port 640 can win a prize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level of winning the second winning hole 640 from being lowered, and to improve the game performance.

Also, since the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, even if the distance from the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a to the second specific winning opening 650a (horizontal direction dimension in FIG. 5) is increased, It does not affect the distance between the third symbol display device 81 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a is arranged between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. can be done. As a result, it is possible to increase the speed of detecting that the ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650a, so that the player's sense of exhilaration associated with winning can be enhanced.

In addition to this, it is possible to prevent over-winning to the second specific winning port 650a. That is, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the open second specific winning hole 650a, the second specific winning hole 650a is closed. It is desirable that the driving accessory 650b be closed immediately when the ball wins. However, when the sensor device 652 is arranged behind the base plate 60, the distance from the opening 651 to the sensor device 652 increases.

Therefore, the period from when the 10th ball passes through the opening 651 to when it reaches the sensor device 652, that is, the period during which the driving accessory 650b is in the open state becomes longer, and the 11th ball and subsequent balls pass through the opening 651. A state in which the second specific prize winning port 650a can win a prize is formed for a long period of time, and there is a possibility that the game lacks fairness.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a is located between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. , the period until the ball passing through the opening 651 is detected by the sensor device 652 can be shortened. This makes it difficult for the 11th and subsequent balls to win a prize through the opening 651, thereby preventing over-winning.

Here, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a are arranged to be offset in the left and right (one side and the other side) directions of the game board 13, respectively. This allows the player to distinguish between left and right shots, contributing to the improvement of game playability.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, it is easier to win a prize by passing through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 to the first specific prize winning port 65a, while the variable display device to the second specific prize winning port 650a is easier to win. The arrangement is such that it is easier to win a prize when passing on the left side of the unit 80 . Which of the specific winning holes is to be opened is determined by the stop pattern of the jackpot at that time, and the player separates the shots to the left and right to aim at the specific winning holes on the side to be opened.

Which specific winning opening is opened can be set in units of the number of times (rounds) for each stop symbol of the jackpot, so there is a case where only the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened each time. On the other hand, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a may alternately open every number of times (rounds).

Therefore, it is necessary for the player to confirm which of the specific winning ports will be opened by the number of rounds (rounds), and to aim for the specific winning ports to be opened. It has the effect of drawing attention to one side as well as the other side. That is, to prevent the player from paying attention to only one side or the other side of the game board 13, and to create a situation in which the rotating operation unit 300 arranged behind the first prize winning port 64 is within sight. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the rotating operation unit 300 and improve the presentation effect.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by making the decision to separate the left and right shots for each number of times (rounds) of the big win, and by making the player separate the left and right shots, the player can keep the same posture. It is possible to alleviate fatigue caused by playing games.

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 13. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the structure for housing the units 300 to 800 in the rear case 210 will be described.

6 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 7 to 9 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the operation unit 200 is disassembled and viewed from the front. 8 shows a state in which the swing motion unit 800, the annular motion unit 700, and the first joint motion unit 500 are attached to the rear case 210, and FIG. Further, the state in which the second combined operation unit 600 and the combined operation unit 400 are attached to the rear case 210 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the operation unit 200 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and one side (the front side of FIG. 7) is open. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, so that the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The motion unit 200 includes a rotation motion unit 300, a compound motion unit 400, a first combined motion unit 500, a second combined motion unit 600, an annular motion unit 700, and a swing motion unit 800, respectively, in the inner space of the rear case 210. It is housed and configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first coupling motion unit 500 is positioned above the opening 211a, the annular motion unit 700 is positioned below the opening 211a, and the rocking motion unit 800 is positioned to the left and right of the opening 211a. , are disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 8).

8, the second joint motion unit 600 and the combined motion unit 500 are arranged in a stacked state on the front side of the annular motion unit 700 and on the front side of the rocking motion unit 800, respectively. and housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 9). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 9, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged in a layered state on the front side of the second coupling operation unit 600 and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 6).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (eg, the second combined operation unit 600) is arranged in a stacked state in which another operation unit (eg, the rotary operation unit 300) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, in a front view, at least part of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the front case body 612 of the second combined operation unit 600, see FIG. 42) can be shielded by another operation unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 is made of a light-transmissive material and the player can visually recognize the action units arranged on the back side of the game board 13, only the necessary parts of the predetermined action units are displayed. can be viewed by the player, and other portions can be shielded from the player by other motion units. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other motion units on the assumption that the entirety of the effect member will be visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in designing can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13, an outline of the operation mode of each unit 300 to 800 will be described. 6 to 9 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIGS. 10 to 13. FIG.

10 to 13 are front views of the operating unit 200. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the ring forming member 790 of the ring motion unit 700 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 12 shows the state in which the first engaging member 539 of the first joint operation unit 500 and the second joint member 630 of the second joint operation unit 600 are arranged in the joint position, and in FIG. 492 are each illustrated in the extended position.

The ring motion unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790, and operates (displaces) the pair of ring forming members 790 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the coupling position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are distributed to the left and right, retracted to the rear side of the rotary operation unit 300, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). 10, the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third pattern display device 81) and are joined together (a pair of The ring shape is formed by the ring forming member 790 of .

The swing motion unit 800 includes a pair of swingable (rotatable) arm members 820 which are moved between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the extended position shown in FIG. to operate (displace). At the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of arm members 820 are retracted to the back side of the compound action unit 400 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 11, the pair of arm members 820 project their tips into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81).

The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 each include a first engaging member 539 and a pair of second coupling members 630, and the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are shown in FIG. It is operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in 9 and the coupling position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the first engaging member 539 is retracted to the back side of the compound action unit 400, and the second coupling member 630 is retracted to the back side of the compound action unit 400, which are visually recognized by the player. disabled (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 12, the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, in front of the third pattern display device 81), combined with each other.

The compound motion unit 400 includes four members (motion members 491 and 492) formed to be able to swing (rotate). and the extended position shown in FIG. 13 (displacement). At the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the four members (movement members 491 and 492) are retracted to the side of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the third pattern display device 81), and each pair is They are arranged in a posture aligned linearly along the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 13, the four members (operation members 491 and 492) project their ends into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81). , extending radially from the center of the opening 211a.

The rotary operation unit 300 includes a rotatably formed rotary member 330 and rotates the rotary member 330 . 10 to 13, the rotary member 330 of the rotary motion unit 300 is rotated at a fixed position, and the motion members 491 and 492 of the combined motion unit 400 are at the extended position or the retracted position. Since it is arranged in the foreground at any position, it is always visible to the player through the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

These operation units 300 to 800 are formed to be independently operable, and are arranged in a superimposed (stacked) state as described above. Those arranged in different layers can be operated simultaneously. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 10 to 13, each of the motion units 300 to 800 can be operated individually, and these motions can be combined to enhance the performance effect.

The rotation operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the rotary motion unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rotary motion unit 300. FIG.

As described above, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged at a position (overlapping position when viewed from the front) corresponding to the first prize winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5) on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). A receiving port 361 is opened in the center of the front, and a ball won in the first winning port 64 is received from the receiving port 361 and guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) via a guide passage 380. do.

A rotating member 330 having an annular shape in a front view and a decorative member 370 made of resin for decoration are disposed on the front side of the rotating operation unit 300 . (fixing member 360) is arranged. The rotating member 330 is rotatably formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and transmits the lighting and blinking of the LED arranged on the back side thereof to the front side, and rotates itself to obtain the first prize. A predetermined effect is performed around the mouth 64 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 5).

16 and 17 are exploded front perspective views of the rotary motion unit 300 in which the rotary motion unit 300 is viewed from the front. 16 shows a state in which only the rotating member 330 is disassembled. Also, in FIG. 17, illustration of the decorative member 370 is omitted, and a part of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is partially shown in cross section.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the rotary operation unit 300 includes a case body 310 forming a skeleton on the rearmost side, an illumination base 320 fixed to the case body 310, and a front surface of the illumination base 320. A rotating member 330 disposed on the side, a plurality of gears (first gear 351, second gear 352 and third gear 353) for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 340 to the rotating member 330, and those It mainly includes a fixing member 360 for fixing the first gear 351 of the plurality of gears to the case body 310 and a decorative member 370 arranged around the case body 310 .

The case body 310 includes an illumination base mounting portion 311 formed in a generally annular shape in a front view corresponding to the illumination base 320, and a gear mounting portion formed backward from the illumination base mounting portion 311. 312, and a mounting pedestal 313 extending outward from the outer edges of the electrical decoration base mounting portion 311 and the gear mounting portion 312, respectively, and these are integrally formed from a resin material.

The electric decoration base 320 is fastened to the front side of the electric decoration base mounting portion 311, and the decoration member 370 is fastened and fixed to the outer peripheral side of the electric decoration base mounting portion 311, respectively. The gear mounting portion 312 is formed by three contiguous recesses that are substantially circular in front view and are recessed corresponding to the outer shapes of the first gear 351 to the third gear 353, respectively. , the third gear 353 is accommodated (arranged).

An opening 311a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the illumination base mounting portion 311 above a portion of the gear mounting portion 312 where the first gear 351 is accommodated. By forming an opening 311a in the case body 310, the rotary member 330 (fastened portion 333) is attached to the first gear 351 (fastened seat portion 351d) by a fastening screw from the back side of the case body 310 through the opening 311a. The fastening can be fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being exposed on the front side of the rotating member 330, thereby improving the appearance.

A passage opening 314 , a fastened portion 315 , an insertion portion 316 , and a guide protrusion 317 are formed in a concave portion in which the first gear 351 is housed in the gear mounting portion 312 . The passage port 314 is a passage that communicates with the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360 , and guides the ball that has flowed in from the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360 to the guide passage 380 formed on the back side of the case body 310 .

By attaching a member having a U-shaped cross section to the back surface of case body 310, guide passage 380 is formed as a passage through which a ball can pass between the attached member and the back surface of case body 310. (See FIG. 15). The guide passage 380 communicates with the passage port 314 on the back surface of the case body 310 and extends downward.

The mounting pedestal 313 is provided with an insertion hole, and by fastening a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole to the front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600, the rotation operation unit 300 is coupled to the second coupling. It is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210 via the operation unit 600 (see FIGS. 9 and 42).

The fastened portion 315 is a portion (recessed portion having a female thread engraved on the inner circumference) to which a fastening screw is fastened to fasten and fix the fixing member 360 to the gear mounting portion 312 . A pair is formed at an asymmetric position (see FIG. 18). The insertion portion 315 is for inserting a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the gear mounting portion 312 (case body 310) to the front case body 612 (see FIGS. 9 and 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 on the back side. It is a through hole and is formed above the passage port 314 .

The guide convex portion 317 is a rail-shaped portion for guiding the rotation of the first gear 351 , and projects from the front of the gear mounting portion 312 as an annular convex portion when viewed from the front. A circular guide recess 351e corresponding to the guide portion 317 is provided on the back surface of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 19). , the rotational position of the first gear 351 with respect to the gear mounting portion 312 is defined.

Here, the gear mounting portion 312 is arranged at a position (eccentric position) in which the passage opening 314 is shifted downward from the center in the circular area surrounded by the guide protrusions 317 when viewed from the front. , the fastened portions 315 are arranged on both sides of the passage opening 314 , and the insertion portion 316 is arranged above the passage opening 314 . Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to ensure the rigidity of the case body 310 and the fixing member 360 while efficiently ensuring a space for fastening and fixing in a limited space.

A shaft portion 318 protrudes from a concave portion in which the second gear 352 is accommodated in the gear mounting portion 312 . The shaft portion 318 is a shaft body for supporting the second gear 352 , and is inserted through a shaft hole 352 a drilled in the center of the second gear 352 . In addition, in the present embodiment, provision of a retainer for the second gear 352 at the tip of the shaft portion 318 inserted through the shaft hole 352a of the second gear 352 can be omitted. Details will be described later.

A driving motor 340 is provided on the rear surface of the gear mounting portion 312 at a position corresponding to the recess in which the third gear 353 is accommodated. The drive motor 340 is disposed with its drive shaft 340a protruding from the front surface of the gear mounting portion 312 (inside the recess in which the third gear 353 is accommodated), and the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a. be.

The illumination base portion 320 includes a substrate portion 321 which is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and has a plurality of LEDs 321a mounted on the front side thereof, and a plurality of LEDs 321a arranged in front of the substrate portion 321. and a dividing portion 322 that divides into regions.

Specifically, the dividing portion 322 includes an annular inner edge rib 322a and an outer edge rib 322b extending along the inner edge and the outer edge of the substrate portion 321, and a predetermined interval between the ribs 322a and 322b. An intermediate rib 322c formed concentrically and having an annular shape when viewed from the front and a plurality of radial ribs 322d radially extending radially outward from the center of each of the ribs 322a to 322c intersect in a grid pattern. are arranged. In addition, the plurality of radial ribs 322d are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (at intervals of approximately 30 degrees in this embodiment).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a total of 24 regions, 12 on the inner peripheral side and 12 on the outer peripheral side, are partitioned by the partitions 322 in the illumination base 320, and each partitioned region has a One or two LEDs 321a are provided. As a result, when each LED 321a is lit or blinked individually, the difference in brightness between the area related to the lighting or blinking and the area not related to the lighting or blinking can be increased, and as a result, the production effect is enhanced. be able to.

The rotating member 330 includes a rotating body 331 having an annular shape in a front view and having an opening formed in the center, and a cylindrical outer wall portion 332 extending axially from the outer edge of the rotating body 331 . It is integrally formed from a flexible resin material. The inner diameter of the opening formed in the center of the rotating body 331 corresponds to the outer diameter of the fixing member 360, and the fixing member 360 is accommodated in the opening of the rotating body 331 in the assembled state (see FIG. 14).

Fastened portions 333 are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the back surface of the rotating body 331 . The fastened portion 333 is a portion (recessed portion having a female thread engraved on the inner periphery) to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the rotating body 331 (rotating member 330) to the first gear 351 is fastened. 331, and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

A plurality of annular protrusions 331a to 331e, which are formed in a ring shape when viewed from the front and are concentrically arranged on the front surface of the rotating body 331, radiate outward in the radial direction from the centers of the annular protrusions 331a to 331e. A plurality of radiating protrusions 331f that extend linearly are provided. It should be noted that the plurality of radial projections 331f are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degree intervals in this embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, the circumferential spacing of the radial projections 331f matches the circumferential spacing of the radial ribs 322d of the decorative base 320. As shown in FIG.

The rotary main body 331 is formed with a uniform thickness (thickness dimension) as a whole, and the portions where the annular protrusions 331a to 331e or the radial protrusions 331f protrude have a thickness ( thickness dimension) is thickened (large). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for light to pass through the portions where the projections 331a to 331f are projected.

In this case, in the assembled state of the rotary motion unit 300, the outer edge rib 322b of the partition member 322 is located at a position corresponding to the radially outermost annular projection 331e (overlapping position when viewed from the front) and the annular projection 331d. Intermediate ribs 322c of the partitioning member 322 are arranged at positions (overlapping positions in a front view) corresponding to positions between the annular protrusions 331d and 331c, which are positions positioned radially outward next to the annular protrusions 331d and 331c. .

In this way, in the rotating member 330, the areas corresponding to the areas partitioned by the partitioning member 322 of the illumination base 320 are partitioned by the protrusions 331a to 331f, so that each LED 321a of the illumination base 320 are individually lit or blinked, the difference in brightness between the area related to the lighting or blinking and the area not related to the lighting or blinking can be increased, and as a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Such division of the area is achieved in the rotary member 330 by projecting the annular protrusions 331a to 331e and the radial protrusion 331f from the front and increasing the thickness, as described above. As a result, for example, there is no need to apply printing to partition the area on the front surface of the rotating member 330 or to dispose a separate member, and the entire rotating member 330 can be formed in a single color, thereby reducing the product cost. In addition, the production effect can be enhanced.

The outer wall portion 332 of the rotating member 330 has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the partition member 322 (outer edge rib 322b) of the electrical decoration base 320. A partitioning member 322 of the electrical decoration base 320 is fitted inside on the peripheral side. As a result, the light from the LED 321a can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral side of the partitioning member 322, and the front side can be efficiently irradiated with light. Further, when the rotating member 330 is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351, the partitioning member 322 is internally fitted to the outer wall portion 332, so that both are centered. can be rotated relative to each other. That is, only by relatively rotating both of them, each fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 can be aligned with each fastening seat portion 351d (insertion hole) of the first gear 351, and the position in the radial direction can be adjusted. Since there is no need to do so, workability can be improved accordingly.

The first gear 351 has an annular first body 351a having an opening in the center and through which the fixing member 360 can be inserted, and teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first body 351a. 351b, a first flange portion 351c projecting in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotary member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the tooth 351b, and a third flange portion thereof. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening seat portions 351d projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than 351c, and the first main body 351a. and a guide recess 351e (see FIG. 19) that is recessed on the back side of the gear mounting portion 312 and through which the guide projection 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted. It is rotatably held between the fixed member 360 and the gear mounting portion 312 .

Since the first gear 351 is formed by projecting the first flange portion 351c from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a, the rigidity of the first gear 351 can be increased by the first flange portion 351c. In particular, in the present embodiment, the first flange portion 351c is connected to the axial end face of the tooth 351b, so the rigidity of the tooth 351b can be increased. As a result, the meshing state with the second gear 352 can be optimized, and the transmission efficiency can be improved, and the durability of the teeth 351b and 352b can be improved. In addition, as will be described later, the first flange portion 351c also serves to prevent the second gear 352 from coming off, so that the part for preventing the second gear 352 from coming off can be omitted, and the cost of the parts can be reduced.

The fastening seat portions 351d are portions to be fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 333 of the rotating body 331 (rotating member 330), and are arranged at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 333 of the rotating body 331, respectively. That is, each fastening seat portion 351d is provided with an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastened portion 333, and the insertion holes are at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. , and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 can be fastened and fixed only at one phase position. can be avoided.

In order to enable the fastening and fixing of the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 only at one phase position, the insertion holes of the fastening seats 351 must be positioned at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. Doesn't have to be installed. The insertion holes of the fastening seats 351 may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at different distances from the center of the rotating body 331 .

However, it is preferable to dispose the insertion holes of the respective fastening seats 351 at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351 as in the present embodiment. That is, since the length dimension (protruding length) of each fastening seat portion 351d can be the same, when the first gear 351 is injection-molded from a resin material, the moldability can be improved. be.

Here, in order to fasten and fix the fastening screw to the fastened portion 333 of the rotary member 330 through the insertion hole of the fastening seat portion 351d from the back side of the case body 310, it is necessary to form the opening 311a in the case body 310. There is In this case, if the insertion holes of the fastening members 351 are arranged at different distances from the center of the first gear 351, the movement trajectories of the insertion holes will be different. However, according to the present embodiment, the movement trajectory of each insertion hole can be made the same, so the opening width of the opening 311a can be minimized accordingly.

The second gear 352 has a circular second body 352a when viewed from the front, teeth 352b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second body 352a, and a shaft hole 352c drilled in the center of the second body 352a. By inserting the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, the gear mounting portion 312 is rotatably held in mesh with the first gear 351 .

The third gear 353 includes a third body 353a having a circular shape when viewed from the front, teeth 353b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the third body 353a, and teeth 353b closer to the front side of the third gear 353 (rotary member 330 than the teeth 353b). and a third flange portion 353c projecting in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a at a position where the third main body 353a becomes the side). It is held by the drive shaft 340 a of the drive motor 340 while being meshed with the second gear 352 .

Therefore, when the drive motor 340 is rotationally driven and the third gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 352, and the second gear 352 is rotated. It is transmitted to the first gear 351 and the first gear 351 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 340 is transmitted to the rotating member 330 fastened and fixed to the first gear 351 via the fastening seat portion 351d and the fastened portion 333, and the rotating member 330 is rotated.

As in the case of the first gear 351, the third gear 353 is formed by projecting the third flange portion 353c from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a. can increase the rigidity of In particular, in the present embodiment, the third flange portion 353c is connected to the axial end surface of the tooth 353b, so the rigidity of the tooth 353b can be increased. As a result, it is possible to optimize the meshing state with the second gear 352, improve the transmission efficiency, and improve the durability of the teeth 353b and 352b. Further, as will be described later, the third flange portion 353c also serves to prevent the second gear 352 from coming off.

The fixing member 360 is a cylindrical member for fixing the first gear 351 to the gear mounting portion 312 , and includes a receiving port 361 and an insertion portion 362 . The receiving port 361 is a passage that communicates with the first winning port 64 when attached to the game board 13 , and guides the ball that has flowed in from the first winning port 64 to the passage port 314 of the gear mounting portion 312 . The insertion portion 362 is a through hole for inserting a fastening screw for fastening or inserting the fixing member 360 to the fastening portion 315 or the insertion portion 316 of the gear mounting portion 312 .

18(a) is a front view of the case body 310, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of the fixing member 360. FIG. 18(a) shows a state in which the first gear 351, the second gear 352 and the third gear 353 are arranged in the case body 310, and the position of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is shown. A part is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), the passage opening 314 formed in the gear mounting portion 312 of the case body 310 is located downward from the center of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 18 ( a) underside) is displaced (eccentrically). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the passage opening 314, the gear mounting portion 312 has a width dimension above the passage opening 314 (vertical dimension in FIG. 18(a)) larger than a width dimension below the passage opening 314. Widened.

Similarly, for the fixing member 360 that is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the first gear 351 and fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312 , the receiving port 361 formed in the fixing member 360 is downward from the center of the fixing member 360 ( 18(b) lower side). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the receiving port 361, the fixing member 360 has a width dimension above the receiving port 361 (vertical dimension in FIG. 18(b)) that is wider than a width dimension below the receiving port 361. be done.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the passage port 314 and the receiving port 361 are displaced (eccentrically), and a wide portion (increased width dimension) is formed in a part of the periphery (annular region). Since the insertion portions 316 and 362 are arranged (drilled) in the widened portions, the limited space can be effectively used to drill large-diameter holes. And the rigidity of the fixing member 360 can be ensured.

That is, the insertion portions 316 and 362 are formed as holes through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the rotary operation unit 300 to the front case body 612 (see FIG. 9 or FIG. 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 can be inserted. Since the weight to be supported increases, large-diameter fastening screws are inserted through the holes, so they need to be formed as relatively large-diameter holes. By forming an enlarged portion, such portion can be utilized to efficiently reserve space for drilling large diameter holes. On the other hand, even when such a large-diameter hole is drilled, the hole is drilled in the partially widened region, so the rigidity can be ensured.

FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the support structure of the first gear 351, the second gear 352 and the third gear 353 by the case body 310, and corresponds to the arrow XIX direction view in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 19, the case body 310 is shown in cross section, and a part of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are partially shown in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first gear 351 is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 by fitting the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the guide recess 351e provided on the rear side. be. Further, the first gear 351 is restricted from coming off from the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19) by a fixing member 360 fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312 . Meanwhile, the third gear 353 is fixed to the driving shaft 340 a of the driving motor 340 . Examples of fixing methods include press-fitting and adhesive.

The second gear 352 has teeth 351b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 by inserting the shaft 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c formed in the second body 352a. , 353b and rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312. As shown in FIG.

In this case, as described above, the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 have the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 351c projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the first body 351a and the third body 353a. A portion 353c is formed, and the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c protrude to a position overlapping the axial end surface of the second gear 352. As shown in FIG. As a result, the second gear 352 can be restricted from slipping out of the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19). As a result, it is not necessary to dispose a retaining part at the tip of the shaft portion 318, so the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the cost of the parts can be suppressed. In addition, when assembling the second gear 352, it is only necessary to insert the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, and the step of attaching a retaining part can be omitted, so the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the first flange portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the third flange portion 353c of the third gear 353 abut on the second gear 352 at two different points, so that the second gear 352 moves in the axial direction. Not only is it possible to reliably prevent the second gear 352 from slipping out, but it is also possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while tilting with respect to the shaft portion 318 . As a result, the meshing state between the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 and the teeth 351b and 353b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 can be optimized to improve transmission efficiency and durability. In particular, the two points that contact the second gear 352 are set at positions that differ in phase by about 180 degrees, so the above effects can be exhibited more remarkably. The phases of the two points are preferably set within a range of about 160 degrees to about 180 degrees.

Here, it is sufficient that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 protrude toward the peak side from the valleys of the teeth 351b and 353b. This is because if the tooth 351b and the tooth 353 protrude beyond the valleys, the tooth 352b of the second gear 352 can come into contact with the end face of the tooth 352b on the crest side. In addition, it is possible to suppress the materials required for forming the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c, thereby achieving weight reduction and material cost reduction. However, it is preferable that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c protrude further radially outward than the crest sides of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353 . This is because the inclination of the second gear 352 can be suppressed more reliably.

Next, the compound action unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 30. FIG.

The compound motion unit 400 includes four members (motion members 491 and 492) as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 13), and each member (motion members 491 and 492) is operated (displaced). It consists of four units for That is, in the front view of the rear case 210, two units are vertically aligned on the left side of the opening 211a, and two units are vertically aligned on the right side of the opening 211a. consists of one unit. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacing) each member (operating members 491 and 492) is the same for each of the four units, one of these four units will be described below. (the unit arranged on the upper right side of the opening 211a, see FIGS. 7 and 13) will be referred to as a compound action unit 400 and will be described.

20 is a front perspective view of compound action unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the compound motion unit 400 has motion members 491 and 492 arranged on the front side of a mounting base 410, and makes the motion members 491 and 492 perform opening/closing motion and rotating motion in a compound manner (see FIG. 20). 27). In other words, the operation members 491 and 492 are opposed to each other with their longitudinal directions parallel to each other. A movement that rotates about a center (rotational movement) is feasibly formed. A decorative member 411 formed as a decorative body is arranged on the front surface of the mounting base 410 .

In this embodiment, two types of operation modes (opening/closing operation and rotating operation) of the operation members 491 and 492 can be executed by one drive motor 430 . Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the drive motors 430 for the two types of operation modes, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. A detailed configuration of such a structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23. FIG.

FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit 400 in which the compound action unit 400 is viewed from the front. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the compound action unit 400 in a partially disassembled state, in which the configuration shown on the left side of FIG. 22 is viewed from the front and the configuration shown on the right side of FIG. The configuration is viewed from the back. 21 and 22, illustration of the decorative member 411 is omitted, and illustration of the mounting base 410 is omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the compound action unit 400 includes a mounting base 410 arranged on the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), a holding case 420 mounted on the mounting base 410, and a holding case 420. a plurality of gears rotatably supported by the gears, a driving motor 430 that generates driving force for rotating the plurality of gears, and a back arm whose base end is rotatably supported by the holding case 420 A body 471 and a front arm body 472, a slide rack member 481, a first pinion leg member 482 and a second pinion leg member 483 sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, It mainly includes operating members 491 and 492 connected to the tips of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 .

The holding case 420 includes a back case body 421 attached to the mounting base 410 and a front case body 422 facing the front side of the back case body 421 . A plurality of gears are rotatably supported and accommodated in an internal space formed between the opposed gears.

In the holding case 420, a driving motor 430 is arranged on the back side of the back case body 421, and three rotating shafts (a deceleration shaft 425, a A first shaft 426 and a second shaft 427 ) are installed parallel to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430 , and a plurality of gears are rotatably supported from the reduction shaft 425 to the second shaft 427 . A pinion gear 431 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430 .

A plurality of gears are a reduction gear 441 supported by a reduction shaft 425 , an opening/closing first gear 451 and a rotating first gear 461 supported by a first shaft 426 , and an opening/closing gear supported by a second shaft 427 . It consists of a second gear 452 and a rotating second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The reduction gear 441 includes a large-diameter gear 441a and a small-diameter gear 441b coaxially and integrally formed with the large-diameter gear 441a. . Here, the first opening/closing gear 451, the second opening/closing gear 452, the first rotating gear 461, and the second rotating gear 462 will be described with reference to FIG.

23 is a front perspective view of the first opening/closing gear 451, the second opening/closing gear 452, the first rotating gear 461, and the second rotating gear 462. FIG. The opening/closing first gear 451 includes a main body portion 451a, an insertion hole 451b formed through the main body portion 451a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, and a hole 451b that is the center of the insertion hole 451b. teeth 451c provided, a pair of connecting protrusions 451d protruding from the axial end face (front face) of the body portion 451a and positioned across the insertion hole 451b, and formed through the body portion 451a to the side of the insertion hole 451b. locating holes 451e.

The rotary first gear 461 is a gear that is arranged on the front side of the opening/closing first gear 451 and supported by the first shaft 426 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) together with the opening/closing first gear 451. The body portion 461a an insertion hole 461b that is formed through the body portion 461a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted; teeth 461c that are carved on a part of the outer circumference of the body portion 461a around the insertion hole 461b; and a pair of connecting holes 461d that penetrate through the body 461b and are located on both sides of the insertion hole 461b, and a detected portion 461e that protrudes radially outward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 451a and is detected by an optical sensor.

The main body portion 461a of the first rotating gear 461 has a cylindrical surface (hereinafter referred to as a (referred to as "cylindrical surface 461a1"). The outer diameter of the cylindrical surface 461a1 (distance from the axis of the insertion hole 461b) is smaller than the outer diameter of the addendum circle of the tooth 461c and larger than the outer diameter of the root circle of the tooth 461c. As will be described later, this makes it possible to improve both the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the first rotating gear 461 and the rigidity of the portion of the second rotating gear 462 where the non-formed surface 462a1 is formed.

A pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 are formed in the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 so as to be able to be fitted therein. The rotational position (phase) of the first gear 461 can be determined, and the two can be connected and rotated together in the same phase.

The opening/closing second gear 452 includes a body portion 452a, an insertion hole 452b formed through the body portion 452a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a part of the outer circumference of the body portion 452a centered on the insertion hole 452b. A tooth 452c provided, a connecting projection 452d projecting from the axial end face (front face) of the body portion 452a, and a positioning hole 452e formed through the body portion 452a.

The opening/closing second gear 452 is disposed with the back arm body 471 sandwiched between it and the back case body 421 (that is, on the front side of the back arm body 471), and the back arm body 471 is pivotally supported. The insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion erected along the hole 471a (see FIGS. 21 and 22). The connecting projection 452d of the second opening/closing gear 452 is connected to the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, and the rotation of the second opening/closing gear 452 is transmitted to the slide rack member 481 through this connection (Fig. 26).

The second rotating gear 462 includes a main body portion 462a, an insertion hole 462b formed through the main body portion 462a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 462a centered on the insertion hole 462b. teeth 462c provided, a pair of connecting protrusions 462d protruding from the axial end face (front face) of the main body portion 462a and having holes formed therein, and positioning holes 462e formed through the main body portion 452a. Prepare.

The main body portion 462a of the second rotating gear 462 is connected to both sides of the teeth 462c, and the outer peripheral surface of the region where no teeth are formed (hereinafter referred to as "non-formation surface 462a1") is on the insertion hole 462b side. It is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward (that is, has the center of curvature on the radially outward side). Specifically, the curvature of the non-forming surface 462a1 is set to the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 or a slightly smaller curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

In addition, the rotating second gear 462 is disposed on the front side of the opening/closing second gear 452 (in an attitude overlapping in the axial direction), but is independent of the opening/closing second gear 452 (that is, in a different phase). is supported by the second shaft 427 in a relatively rotatable state). In addition, the second rotating gear 462 is connected to the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the hole of the connecting protrusion 462d to the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472. are connected. Therefore, through such connection, the rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471) can be integrally rotated in the same phase.

In this way, since the connecting projection 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 is fastened and fixed to the connecting projection 462d of the second rotating gear 462, both are connected via the connecting projections 462d and 472e. The rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 can be formed as an integrated structure by connecting them at a plurality of points (two points in this embodiment). As a result, the rigidity of the second rotating gear 462 can be increased using the rigidity of the front arm body 472 .

Here, as will be described later, the second rotating gear 462 receives a reaction force from the first rotating gear 461 when the non-forming surface 462a1 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 (Fig. 28 to 30), it is necessary to ensure rigidity to resist the reaction force. In this case, for example, if the thickness of the second rotary gear 462 is increased, the weight will increase, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost will increase.

On the other hand, according to the second rotating gear 462 of the present embodiment, the rigidity of the front arm body 472 can be used (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472) to increase the rigidity. , there is no need to increase the thickness of the second rotating gear 462 or adopt a highly rigid material. As a result, the durability of the second rotating gear 462 can be improved while reducing the weight and cost of the second rotating gear 462 .

In particular, the second rotating gear 462 has its connecting protrusion 462d on the back side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (that is, in the assembled state, the position facing the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. 28 to 30), when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461, the first rotating gear 461 is arranged on the first rotating gear 461. The rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of 461 can be effectively increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front case body 472 or the like or by using the fastening screws made of metal. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both reduction in weight and cost of the second rotary gear 462 and improvement in its durability.

Also, the gear ratio of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 is the same as the gear ratio of the first opening/closing gear 451 and the second opening/closing gear 452 . Therefore, as will be described later, when the first rotary gear 461 is rotated by a unit rotation angle, the rotation angle by which the second rotation gear 462 is rotated is the same as the unit rotation angle, and the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated by the same amount. It is coincident with the rotation angle by which the rotation second gear 462 is rotated when it is rotated.

Returning to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, description will be made. In the assembled state, the pinion gear 431 of the drive motor 430 is meshed with the large-diameter gear 441a of the reduction gear 441, and the small-diameter gear 441b of the reduction gear 441 is meshed with the opening/closing first gear 451. The second opening/closing gear 451 is meshed with the second opening/closing gear 452, and the first rotating gear 461 is meshed with the second rotating gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, when the driving motor 430 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the opening/closing first gear 451 via the pinion gear 431 and the reduction gear 441, and the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated.

In this case, as described above, the first opening/closing gear 451 and the first rotation gear 461 are connected by fitting the connecting protrusion 451d into the connecting hole 461d, so that they can rotate integrally in the same phase. be done. That is, when the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated, the rotation causes the rotation first gear 461 to rotate. They are transmitted to the second gear 462, respectively.

In this embodiment, the second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotation gear 462 are independent of each other, and are relatively rotatable in different phases (see FIGS. 28 to 30). Therefore, while the first opening/closing gear 451 and the first rotation gear 461 are integrally rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving motor 430, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the second opening/closing gear 452, and the rotational driving force is transmitted to the second gear 452. A state in which the rotational driving force to the second gear 462 is interrupted can be formed. In other words, it is possible to create a state in which the rotating motion of the motion members 491 and 492 is stopped and the opening/closing motion is executed. The details of such structure and operation will be described later.

Positioning holes 421a and 421b are formed through the rear case body 421 on the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, respectively. Positioning holes 410a and 410b are also formed through the mounting base 410 corresponding to these positioning holes 421a and 421b. That is, when the back case body 421 is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410, the positioning hole 410a and the positioning hole 410b communicate with the positioning hole 421a and the positioning hole 421b, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the gears 451 and 452 with respect to the back case body 421 are inserted into the positioning holes 421a and 421b and the positioning holes 451e, 452e and 462e of the gears 451, 452 and 462, respectively. , 461 and 462, and the phase (rotational position) between the first rotating gear 461 and the first opening/closing gear 451 and the second rotating gear 462 and the second opening/closing gear 452. can. A method for such positioning will be described later.

The back arm body 471 is a member for transmitting the rotation of the second rotating gear 462 together with the front arm body 472 to the operating members 491 and 492 to rotate the operating members 491 and 492 (see FIG. 26). A shaft support hole 471a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) through-holes 471b through which fastening screws (not shown) are inserted, a first pinion leg member 482 and a second pinion. A plurality of (four in this embodiment) shafts 471c that rotatably support the leg members 483, and linearly extending along the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 as concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section. and a positioning hole 471e formed through the side of the shaft support hole 471a.

A collar 427a provided on the back case body 421 is inserted into the shaft support hole 471a, thereby allowing the back arm body 471 to rotate about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back case body 421. be. A cylindrical portion forming the inner peripheral surface of the shaft support hole 471a is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second open/close gear 452, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion allows the second open/close gear 452 to rotate. pivoted on.

The positioning holes 471e are formed through positions corresponding to the positioning holes 462 of the second rotation gear 462 and the positioning holes 452e of the second opening/closing gear 452, respectively. That is, as will be described later, when the front arm body 472 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the back arm body 471 and the rotating second gear 462 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the front arm body 472, the back arm body 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462 (rotational position about the second shaft 427) are matched. On the other hand, the second opening/closing gear 452 has its insertion hole 452b rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm body 471, and the second opening/closing gear 452 moves around the back arm body 452 around this shaft support portion. 471 and placed at a predetermined rotational position, the positioning hole 452e of the second opening/closing gear 452 is aligned with the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the second rotation gear 462. , their phases (rotational positions about the second axis 427) are matched.

The front arm body 472 has a shaft support hole 472a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a fastening screw protruding toward the back arm body 471 and inserted through the insertion hole 471b of the back arm body 471 can be fastened at the tip. A plurality of (four in this embodiment) raising fastening portions 472b formed in the second embodiment, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) receiving recesses 472c that are recesses capable of receiving the tip of the shaft portion 471c, and a U-shaped cross section A guide groove 472d linearly extending along the longitudinal direction of the front arm body 472 as a groove of a shape, and a connecting protrusion 462d of the second rotating gear 462 arranged across the shaft support hole 472a ( and a connection protrusion 472e that is fastened and fixed.

A collar 422a provided on the front case body 422 is inserted into the shaft support hole 472a, thereby allowing the front arm body 472 to rotate about the second shaft 427 with respect to the front case body 422. be. That is, since the front arm body 472 is connected to the second rotating gear 462 via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e, the second rotating gear 462 receives the rotational driving force from the first rotating gear 461, and the second rotating gear 462 rotates. When rotated about the axis 427 , the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471 connected to the front arm body 472 ) are also rotated about the second axis 427 together with the rotating second gear 462 .

The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are connected to the front arm body 471 and the front arm body 471 by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 471b of the back arm body 471 to the raised fastening portion 472 of the front arm body 472. It is joined with the back surface of the body 472 facing each other. In this case, a gap (space) corresponding to the protrusion height of the raised fastening portion 472b is formed between the facing surfaces (front and back surfaces) of both. Therefore, using this gap, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 can be displaceably arranged.

The slide rack member 481 transmits the rotation of the opening/closing second gear 452 to the operation members 491 and 492 together with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to open and close the operation members 491 and 492. It is a member (see FIGS. 26 and 27), and includes an elongated main body portion 481a, rack portions 481b formed as rack gears on both left and right sides of the main body portion 481a, and formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a. A connecting groove 481c and guide protrusions 481d projecting from the front and rear surfaces of the main body 481 to have a substantially rectangular cross section and linearly extending along the longitudinal direction of the main body 481a are provided.

As described above, the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is a groove through which the connecting protrusion 452d of the second opening/closing gear 452 is inserted. extending linearly along a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the Further, in the assembled state, the slide rack member 481 has its guide protrusion 481d inserted into the guide grooves 471d and 472d of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 . Therefore, the direction in which the slide rack member 481 can slide with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 is the extending direction of the guide grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472). direction) (see FIG. 26).

The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are composed of main body portions 482a and 483a, shaft support holes 482b and 483b formed through one longitudinal end of the main body portions 482a and 483a, and the shaft support hole 482b. , 483b and formed as pinion gears, and connecting holes 482d and 483d formed through the other longitudinal ends of the body portions 482a and 483a. The gear portions 482c and 483c of the slide rack member 481 are engaged with the rack portion 481b of the slide rack member 481 on the left and right sides of the slide rack member 481, respectively.

The shaft support holes 482b and 483b are holes through which the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 is inserted and supported in the assembled state. It is rotatable with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 around the shaft support holes 482b and 483b (shaft portion 471c). Therefore, by sliding the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 are moved through the meshing of the rack portion 481b and the gear portions 482c and 483c. The pinion leg member 483 can be rotated.

The operation members 491 and 492 are formed in a columnar shape from the rear side thereof and are formed to be able to be inserted into the connecting holes 482d and 483d of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 (four in this embodiment). ) are provided. Protruding ends of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed so as to be able to fasten fastening screws. Therefore, by inserting the protruding ends of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a into the connecting holes 482d and 483d and fastening screws to the protruding ends from the side opposite to the insertion direction, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 are connected. Operating members 491 and 492 are connected to the pinion leg member 483 .

In addition, rib-shaped portions protrude from the outer peripheral surfaces of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a except for the projecting ends thereof, and the end surfaces of the rib-shaped portions extend from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion. It abuts on the front surface of the leg member 483 . As a result, the operation members 491 and 492 can be arranged at positions raised from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 by the protrusion height of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. Therefore, even in a structure in which the front arm body 472 is arranged between the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, the second pinion leg member 483, and the operation members 491, 492, interference with the front arm body 472 The opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 can be performed without the operation.

Between the pair of first pinion leg members 482, an urging spring 484 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. The first pinion leg members 482 are configured to act toward each other. As a result, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening/closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491 and 492 into close contact with each other, thereby forming a gap. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 24 and 25, a method for positioning the first opening/closing gear 451, the second opening/closing gear 452, the first rotating gear 461, and the second rotating gear 462 will be described. Note that FIGS. 21 to 23 will be referred to as necessary in the description of such a positioning method.

FIGS. 24 and 25 explain the process of assembling the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating first gear 461 and rotating second gear 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in chronological order. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of the compound action unit 400. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 24(a), the state in which the reduction gear 441 is attached to the reduction gear 425 is further opened and closed by the first shaft 426 in FIG. In FIG. 25(a), the state where the first gear 451 is assembled is different from the state shown in FIG. 24(b). FIG. 25(b) shows the state shown in FIG. 25(a), in which the rotary first gear 461 is further assembled to the first shaft 426. As shown in FIG.

Here, as described above, the compound action unit 400 sequentially transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 to the first opening/closing gear 451 and the second opening/closing gear 452 via the reduction gear 441, thereby The rotation of the gear 452 displaces the slide rack member 481 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492 , and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 is applied to the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 via the reduction gear 441 . By sequentially transmitting to , the rotation of the second gear 462 rotates the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 , and rotates the operation members 491 and 492 .

Therefore, in order to properly perform the opening/closing and rotating operations of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, to avoid interference between the members and occurrence of displacement of the movement range), the opening/closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451 is required. and the rotational position of the second rotational gear 462 with respect to the first rotational gear 461 are positioned at predetermined rotational positions, and then each of these gears 451 to 462 is held in the holding case 420 must be assembled respectively.

However, in the conventional game machine, in order to assemble the two gears after positioning the rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the other gear with respect to the other gear, the operator must rotate both gears. Since it was necessary to visually adjust the position for assembly, the work was complicated, and not only was the work efficiency poor, but there was also the risk of assembly failure.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative rotational positions (phases, engagement positions) of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461, and A positioning structure for positioning the mounting positions (phases) of the gears 451, 452, 461, and 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is provided, and by using this positioning structure, when assembling the gears 451 to 462 to the holding case 420, It is configured to be able to avoid the occurrence of defective assembly while improving the workability.

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. As described above, the positioning holes 410a and 410b (see FIG. 21) of the mounting base 410 communicate with the positioning holes 421a and 421b of the back case body 421, respectively. , 410b, and the jigs are projected from the positioning holes 421a and 421b toward the front side of the back case body 421. As shown in FIG. Note that the jig is formed as a columnar body with a circular cross section having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 410a.

Next, the jig protruding from the positioning hole 421a of the back case body 421 is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the first opening/closing gear 451, and the first opening/closing gear 451 is attached to the first shaft 426 (supported). As a result, as shown in FIG. 24B, the first opening/closing gear 451 can be meshed with the reduction gear 441, and the mounting position (phase) of the first opening/closing gear 451 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned. .

While maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (the state in which a jig is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the first opening/closing gear 451), the second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotating gear 462 are then rotated. It is assembled (rotated) on two shafts 427 .

The opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 are operated while being integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 . That is, the opening 452 of the opening/closing second gear 452 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm 471. The second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotating gear 462 are interposed between the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 facing each other. Also, the jig inserted through the positioning hole 421 b of the back case 421 protrudes from the surface of the back case 421 to a height position where it can be inserted through the positioning hole 462 e of the second rotary gear 462 .

In this case, the assembly of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 to the second shaft 427 is performed by inserting a jig protruding from the positioning hole 421b of the back case body 421 into the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 and the opening/closing gear. The opening/closing second gear 452 and the second rotating gear 462 are assembled (supported) on the second shaft 427 while sequentially passing through the positioning hole 452 e of the second gear 452 and the positioning hole 462 e of the second rotating gear 462 . As a result, as shown in FIG. 25A, the second opening/closing gear 452 is meshed with the first opening/closing gear 451, and the rotational position (phase, engagement position) of the second opening/closing gear 452 with respect to the first opening/closing gear 451 is determined. can be positioned, and the attachment positions (phases) of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned.

While maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (at least the state in which the jig is inserted through the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471), finally, the opening/closing first shaft supported by the first shaft 426 is maintained. The connecting protrusion 451d of the first gear 451 is inserted into the connecting hole 461d of the first rotating gear 461, and the first rotating gear 461 is attached to the first shaft 426 (supported). As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the first rotating gear 461 is meshed with the second rotating gear 462, and the mounting position (phase) of the second rotating gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is positioned. can be done.

After the first rotating gear 461 is attached (supported) to the first shaft 426 , the jig is removed from the back side of the back case body 421 . This completes the assembly (rotary support) of the gears 451 to 462 to the back case body 421 (the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, jigs are erected parallel to the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 of the back case body 421, and each gear is inserted into the positioning hole 451e and the like while the jig is inserted. 451 to 462 are sequentially assembled (rotated) on the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, etc., so that the rotational positions (phases, engagement positions) of the gears 451 to 462 are positioned with the back case body 421 as a reference. can do. That is, since the jigs can be inserted at the same time that the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are inserted through the respective gears 451 to 462, the assembly work and the positioning work can be performed at the same time, improving workability. can be planned.

In particular, for the second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotation gear 462, the positioning hole 452e of the second opening/closing gear 452 is formed as a through hole, so that the second shaft of the second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotation gear 462 427 can be assembled (pivotally supported) at the same time. In particular, in this embodiment, since the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 is formed as a through hole, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. can be attached (rotated) to the second shaft 427 with . Therefore, it is not necessary to assemble the arm bodies 471, 472 and the gears 452, 462 while positioning them respectively, and the positioning work can be completed in one assembling work, and the workability can be improved.

Also, in this case, there is no need to prepare dedicated jigs for the second opening/closing gear 452, the second rotating gear 462, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, respectively, and a common jig can be used. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore,
The second gear 452 for opening and closing and the second gear for rotation 462 need to be rotatable independently of each other. 462 can be independently rotatable. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a rotating shaft for each of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are connected to a common rotating shaft (second shaft 427). Since it can be pivotally supported, the product cost can be reduced from this point as well.

On the other hand, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 need to be connected to each other and integrally rotatable in the same phase. In this case, the first opening/closing gear 451 and the first rotating gear 461 are configured by inserting (internally fitting) the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the first opening/closing gear 451 into the pair of connecting holes 461d of the first rotating gear 461. , the two gears 451 and 461 are connected to each other to simultaneously enable the positioning of the rotational position (phase) and the integral rotation in the same phase. That is, the connecting protrusion 451d and the communication hole 461d can be used for positioning the rotational positions (phases) of the two gears 451 and 461 and for connecting the two gears 451 and 461 together for integral rotation. It is not necessary to separately provide a through-hole for positioning (that is, inserting a jig) and a connecting structure for integral rotation. As a result, the shape of both gears 451 and 461 can be simplified, and the manufacturing yield can be improved. In addition, since the number of through-holes formed through the first rotary gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be reduced, rigidity can be secured accordingly, and durability can be improved.

In particular, a pair of communication holes 461d are formed as through holes in the rotation first gear 461, and a pair of connection protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 are inserted (internally fitted) through the pair of communication holes 461d. ), it is possible to improve the rigidity of the first rotary gear 461 (body portion 461a) by the fitting structure.

Here, according to the positioning structure of the present embodiment, as described above, a jig is projected from the front surface of the back case body 421, and the gears 451 to 462 are sequentially rotated while positioning the rotational position using this jig. When the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are assembled (supported), the jig can be removed from the rear surface of the back case body 421 after the assembly of all the gears 451 to 462 is completed. That is, when assembling the gears 451 to 462, the jigs are inserted into the positioning holes 451e to 462e of the already assembled gears 451 to 462 among the gears 451 to 462. The remaining gears 451-461 of the gears 451-462 can be assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker from inadvertently rotating the already assembled gears 451 to 461 during work, so that workability can be improved and reliability of the positioned rotation position can be improved. It is possible to improve the quality.

In this embodiment, the first opening/closing gear 451 and the first rotation gear 461 are coaxially arranged on the first shaft 426, and the second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotation gear 462 are coaxially arranged on the second shaft 427. Therefore, the backlash between the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the backlash between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be generated in the same direction. . Thus, as will be described later, when the operation members 491 and 492 are opened, closed, and rotated (see FIGS. 27 to 30), it is possible to prevent the production timing from being shifted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the opening and closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 will be described. 26(a) to 26(c) are exploded front views of the compound action unit 400 for explaining the relative displacement state of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471. A state in which the operating members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is illustrated. 26(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 26(b), and FIG. This corresponds to a state in which the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (right).

As shown in FIGS. 26(a) to 26(c), the cylindrical portion of the back case body 271 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is inserted through the insertion hole 452b of the opening/closing second gear 452. As a result, the opening/closing second gear 452 is relatively rotatable about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back case 271 .

As described above, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are biased toward each other by the biasing force of the biasing springs 484 (see FIG. 22) installed therebetween. The shaft portion 471c of the arm body 471 rotatably supports the shaft support hole 482b. That is, by receiving the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the first pinion leg member 482 positioned on the right side in FIG. While being rotated (counterclockwise), the first pinion leg member 482 positioned on the left side in FIG. 26(b) is rotated clockwise (rightward) about the shaft portion 471c. Therefore, the slide rack member 481 is moved by the guide recesses 471d and 472d (FIGS. 21 and 22) of both the arm bodies 471 and 472 by the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 acting through the rotation of the pair of first pinion leg members 482. 26 (b), downward (in the direction away from the second opening/closing gear 452, downward in FIG. 26(b)).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(b), when the second opening/closing gear 452 is not rotated against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the connecting projection 452d of the second opening/closing gear 452 slides. The rack member 481 pulls downward (lower in FIG. 26(b)), and the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of sliding displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 26(b)) is the distance L1. . Also, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 has a gap W1 between the connecting holes 482d.

For example, when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d causes the slide rack member 481 to move upward (upward in FIG. 26A) while resisting the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace the slide.

That is, as shown in FIG. 26(a), when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 move in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 26(a)). The distance between them is shortened to a distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. As the slide rack member 481 is slid upward, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in a direction away from each other, and the distance between the connecting holes 482d is enlarged to be the distance W2. (W1<W2).

The pair of second pinion leg members 483 is similar to the pair of first pinion leg members 482, and in the state shown in FIG. 26(a), and in the state shown in FIG. 26(a), as the slide rack member 481 is slid upward, they are separated from each other (the distance between the connecting holes 483d is maximized). state).

When the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (right) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26(a), the state shown in FIG. 26(b) is obtained. is returned to From the state shown in FIG. 26(b), when the opening/closing second gear 452 is further rotated clockwise (right) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the connecting protrusion 452d slides. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d causes the slide rack member 481 to slide upward (upward in FIG. 26(c)) while resisting the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace. 26(a), when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the slide displacement direction (FIG. 26(c) ) vertical direction) is shortened to a distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. be. As the slide rack member 481 is slid upward, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (and the second pinion leg members 483) are rotated in a direction away from each other, and the gap between the connecting holes 482d is increased. The interval is enlarged to be the interval W2 (W1<W2).

Next, referring to FIGS. 27 to 30, the rotation and opening/closing operations of the action members 491 and 492 by the compound action unit 400 will be described.

FIGS. 27(a) to 27(d) are front views of the compound action unit 400 showing the opening/closing action and the rotation action of the action members 491 and 492 in chronological order. 27(a), the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged at the raised position U and opened, while in FIG. 27(b), the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged at the raised position U and closed. 27(c), the operating members 491, 492 are located at the lowered position D and closed, and FIG. 27(d), the operating members 491, 492 are located at the lowered position D and The opened state is illustrated respectively.

FIGS. 28 to 30 schematically illustrate the meshing state between the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the meshing state between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, respectively. 400 is a schematic front view. 28(a) is in the state of FIG. 27(a), FIGS. 28(b) and 29(a) are in the state of FIG. 27(b), and FIG. 29(b) is in the state of FIG. 27(c), FIGS. 29(c) and 30(a) correspond to the state of FIG. 27(c), and FIG. 30(b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 27(d). do. 28(b) and 29(a) and FIGS. 29(c) and 30(a) show the same states.

Here, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines. 28 to 30, one connection projection 451d of the pair of connection projections 451d of the first opening/closing gear 451 and one connection hole of the pair of connection holes 461d of the first rotation gear 461 461d are shown hatched, and the hatched connection projection 451d and connection hole 461d will be described as references for rotation angles θ0 to θ4, which will be described later. That is, the first opening/closing gear 451 and the first rotation gear 462 have the hatched connecting protrusion 451d inserted (innerly fitted) into the hatched connecting hole 461d, and are arranged at the same rotational position.

28 to 30, the rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 in the state in which the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged in the raised position U and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27(a)). The position is the rotation angle θ0, and the rotational positions of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 in the closed state (the state shown in FIG. 27(b)) in which the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the raised position U and closed. Rotational angle θ1 and opening/closing first gear in the closed state (the state between FIGS. 27(b) and 27(c)) in which the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged between the raised position U and the lowered position D. 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are represented by a rotating angle θ2, and the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the lowered position D and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27(c)). The rotational position of the first rotating gear 461 is the rotational angle θ3, and the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotational first gear 451 in the state in which the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the lowered position D and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27(d)). The rotational position of gear 1 461 is defined as rotational angle θ4.

As shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 28(a), when the rotational positions of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are at the rotation angle θ0, the operation members 491 and 492 are at the raised position U. placed and opened. That is, the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (right) to a predetermined rotational position about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 are rotated. By shortening the distance between them to the distance L2, the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (toward the second shaft 427) (the state shown in FIG. 26(c)).

In this case, in the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the first rotating gear 461 abuts the non-forming surface 462a1 of the main body 462a of the second rotating gear 462. . As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 (body portion 461a) is formed as a cylindrical surface centered on the first axis 426, and the second rotating gear 462 (body portion 462a) is not formed. The surface 462a1 is a curved surface that is recessed toward the insertion hole 462b of the second shaft 427 (that is, has the center of curvature on the first shaft 426 side) and has the same curvature as or slightly less than the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotary gear 461. It is formed as a curved surface with a small curvature (ie a slightly larger radius).

Therefore, due to the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1, the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462) is rotated. Rotation around is disabled. That is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 serve as stopper means for restricting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, holding the operating members 491 and 492 at the raised position U). can function.

Here, a conventional game machine includes a rotatably arranged operating member and a driving motor for applying a rotational driving force to the operating member, and the operating member is rotated by a predetermined rotational driving force of the driving motor. Some rotate in range. In this case, for example, when the end of the rotation range of the motion member is set to the raised position and gravity acts on the motion member arranged at the end of the rotation range, the motion member rotates (falls) due to the action of gravity. should be avoided. However, in conventional game machines, the driving force of the drive motor is opposed to gravity (the weight of the operating member) to restrict the rotation (lowering) of the operating member (that is, the operating member is held at the end of the rotation range). ) structure, a large amount of energy is consumed to hold the operating member.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (up position U), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotation gear 461 (body portion 461a) and the second rotation gear 461a. The contact with the non-forming surface 462a1 of the gear 462 (main body portion 462a) can restrict the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492 (the rotational movement of the second rotational gear 462). That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the terminal end of the rotation range (up position U), the operating members 491 and 492 are separated from the drive motor 430. When the operating members 491 and 492 cannot be held at the raised position U using the rotational driving force, the operating members 491 and 492 are moved to the raised position U using the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. can be held effectively. As a result, energy consumption required for holding the operating members 491 and 492 can be suppressed.

In this case, when the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 (main body portion 461a) and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 (main body portion 462a) are in contact with each other (that is, the operating members 491, 492 is placed at the raised position U (and lowered position D, which will be described later), rotation of the second rotary gear 462 in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 can be restricted. Therefore, the rotation of the second rotating gear 462 about the second shaft 427 can be performed only in one direction (that is, the direction in which the operating members 491 and 492 are lowered toward the lowered position D by the action of gravity). only), the vibration of the operating members 491 and 492 when reaching the terminal end of the movement range (the raised position U (and the lowered position D, which will be described later)) is converged. , the operating members 491 and 492 can be rapidly positioned at the end of the movement range. Furthermore, since the operating members 491 and 492 can be stably held at the end of their movement range, the operating members 491 and 492, which should be in the stopped state, are not affected by an external force (for example, , external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine) can suppress vibration and positional deviation.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 (body portion 462a) is in contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 (body portion 461a) (that is, the operating member 491 , 492 are arranged at a raised position U (and a lowered position D, which will be described later), the shape is curved in an arc around the rotation axis (first axis 426) of the first rotation gear 461, It is curved in an arc shape having the same diameter as or slightly larger diameter than the cylindrical surface 461 a 1 of the first rotation gear 461 .

As a result, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 can be brought into smooth contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461, and the two can be easily brought into surface contact. As a result, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are brought into smooth contact with each other, and the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of their movement range (a raised position U (and a lowered position D, which will be described later)) and are stopped. The impact at the time can be moderated, and the contact pressure between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 can be reduced, so that the durability of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 can be improved.

Here, as described above, the second rotating gear 462 has increased rigidity by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472 (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472). Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the second rotating gear 462 or use a highly rigid material. Improvements are being made.

In particular, as described above, the second rotating gear 462 has its connecting protrusion 462d facing the back side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (that is, the position facing the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 with the non-formed surface 462a1 interposed therebetween). ), when the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 at the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later), the rotation The rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first gear 461 can be effectively increased. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both reduction in weight and cost of the second rotary gear 462 and improvement in its durability.

Furthermore, the connecting protrusion 462d of the second rotating gear 462 is disposed at a position facing the rotation shaft (first shaft 426) of the first rotating gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. That is, the non-forming surface 462a1 is arranged on a straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426. As shown in FIG. When the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 at the raised position U (and the lowered position D, which will be described later), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 Since the reaction force received from is applied along a straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426, the second rotating gear 461 By disposing the connecting protrusion 462d of 462, the front arm body 472 can be used to further exhibit the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the first rotating gear 461 (cylindrical surface 461a1). In addition, since a fastening screw made of metal is inserted through the connection convex portion 462d, the rigidity can be increased in this respect as well.

27(a) and 28(a), when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1, the rotation Since the first gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462, the first rotating gear 461 No rotational driving force is transmitted from 461 to the second rotating gear 462, and the second rotating gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and front arm body 472) is not rotated. As a result, the operation members 491 and 492 can be held at the elevated position U without rotating the operation members 491 and 492 (that is, in a state where the rotation operations are stopped).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the first rotating gear 461, and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is opposed to the cylindrical surface 461a1. 1 gear 461 does not transmit rotational driving force to the second rotating gear 462), the rigidity of the first rotating gear 462 can be improved.

That is, even when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference (area corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1) of the first rotating gear 461, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is formed on the top surface of the teeth 461c. By sliding (sliding) them face to face, the blocking state described above can be formed. However, in this case, the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the first rotating gear 461 is reduced due to the formation (recessing) of the teeth 461c. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed in the region facing the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 (the teeth 451c are not formed), so the body portion 461a of the first rotating gear 461 It is possible to improve the rigidity of.

Further, when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the first rotating gear 461 (the area corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is formed on the teeth 461c of the first rotating gear 461. It is necessary to be retracted from the tooth crest to the second shaft 427 side. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the second rotary gear 462 increases, resulting in a decrease in rigidity.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the first rotary gear 461 is formed with a cylindrical surface 461a1, and the cylindrical surface 451a1 extends between the tooth crest and the tooth bottom of the tooth 451c as described above. , the retraction amount of the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotation gear 462 can be reduced. As a result, the projection amount of the non-formation surface 462a1 formation portion of the second rotation gear 462 is ensured (the amount of retraction is suppressed from increasing), and the rigidity of the non-formation surface 462a1 formation portion of the second rotation gear 462 is increased. can be improved.

In particular, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 (that is, has the center of curvature on the first shaft 426 side) as described above, and has teeth 462c. , the cylindrical surface of the first rotating gear 461 protrudes toward the front (toward the first rotating gear 461) (that is, the shape increases the distance from the second shaft 427). While allowing sliding relative to 461a1 (formation of an interrupted state), the amount of protrusion of the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the second rotary gear 462 can be increased to further increase its rigidity.

Since the teeth 451c and 452c of the first opening/closing gear 451 and the second opening/closing gear 452 are meshed with each other, the first opening/closing gear 451 and the first rotation gear 461 are engaged with each other. are integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1 in the same phase, the rotation of the first opening/closing gear 451 is transmitted to the second opening/closing gear 452, and the second opening/closing gear 452 rotates between the back arm body 471 and the back arm body 471. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the front arm body 472 about the second shaft 427 .

As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is increased to the distance L1, and the slide rack member 481 is slid downward (in the direction away from the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26B). ). Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 27(b), 28(b) and 29(a), the opened operation members 491 and 492 can be closed. That is, it is possible to close the open operation members 491 and 492 by executing the opening/closing operation while holding the operation members 491 and 492 at the raised position U.

As shown in FIGS. 27(b), 28(b) and 29(a), the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ1, and the operation members 491 and 492 are moved to the raised position U. , the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 reaches the end of the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461, and the teeth 461c of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462, 462c are in a state just before meshing.

27(b), 28(b) and 29(a), the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3. When the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 are rotated toward each other, the teeth 461c and 462c of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 are meshed with each other so that the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 are engaged with each other. The rotation of 461 is transmitted to the second rotating gear 462, and the second rotating gear 462 rotates clockwise around the second shaft 427 together with the back arm body 471 and front arm body 472. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 29(b), the operation members 491 and 492 can be rotated from the raised position U to the lowered position D. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as described above, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462. Therefore, when the first opening/closing gear 451 and the first rotating gear 461 are rotated together in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 toward the rotation angle θ3, the second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotation gear 462 also rotate in the same manner. integrally rotated in phase. That is, the opening/closing second gear 452 does not rotate relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and as shown in FIG. The front arm body 472 is integrally rotated around the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, it is possible to stop the opening/closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 (hold the operation members 491 and 492 in a closed state).

As a result, when the first opening/closing gear 451 and the first rotation gear 461 are further rotated from the rotation angle θ2, the operating members 491 and 492 are held in a closed state, and the rotating operation is performed to perform the opening/closing first gear. When the gear 451 and the first rotation gear 461 reach the rotation angle θ3, the operation members 491 and 492, which were arranged at the raised position U, are lowered to the lowered position D as shown in FIGS. 27(c) and 29(c). can be placed in

As shown in FIGS. 27(c), 29(c) and 30(a), when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ3, the operation members 491 and 492 are It is placed in the lowered position D and closed. In this case, the teeth 461c and 462c of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 are disengaged, and the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the first rotating gear 461 is engaged with the second rotating gear 462. The non-formation surface 462a1 of the main body portion 462a of is abutted.

That is, the teeth 461c and 462c of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 are disengaged (disengaged), so that the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 are disengaged from each other. , the rotation of the second gear 462 (that is, the rotation of the operating members 491 and 492) can be stopped.

Here, in a conventional game machine, a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of a gear that transmits the rotational driving force of a drive motor to the operating member is provided to stop the operating member. When rotation is detected, or when the amount of drive (the number of rotations or the number of steps) of the drive motor is detected (counted) and the amount of drive reaches a predetermined amount, the operating member moves. It was determined that the end of the range had been reached, and the driving of the drive motor was stopped. In this case, for example, the drive motor may not be stopped even though the operating member has reached the end of the movement range due to a detection failure of the rotational position or drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, conventional game machines have a structure in which a stopper is provided at the end of the movement range of the moving member, and the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper when the driving motor is not properly stopped. However, in such a structure in which the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper, when the operating member collides with the stopper, there is a risk that the operating member and the stopper will be damaged, and that an excessive load will be applied to the drive motor. There is also a possibility that it may act and cause damage to the drive motor.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of their movement range (lowered position D), the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 are disengaged. It can be disengaged (disengaged) to block transmission of rotational driving force from drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to operating members 491 and 492 (rotating second gear 462). Thereby, even when the rotational driving force of the driving motor 430 continues to be generated, the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped.

As a result, it is possible to avoid damage due to collision between the operating members 491 and 492 and other members. Also, even if the operating members 491 and 492 collide with another member, the operating members 491 and 492 are separated from the drive motor 430 (i.e., the teeth of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462). Since the coupling is released) and the drive motor 430 is idle, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the drive motor 430 . It should be noted that the same applies when the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated from the lowered position D toward the raised position U and reach the raised position U, as will be described later.

As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are formed as curved surfaces having shapes corresponding to each other. Therefore, due to the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1, the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462) is rotated. Rotation around is disabled. That is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are stopper means capable of regulating the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, capable of holding the operating members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D). can function as

27(c), 29(c) and 30(a), the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in phase from the rotation angle θ3 toward the rotation angle θ4. When rotated, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 slide between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, no rotational driving force is transmitted from the first rotating gear 461 to the second rotating gear 462, and the second rotating gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and front arm body 472) is not rotated. As a result, the rotating motion of the operating members 491 and 492 is not performed, and the rotating motion can be stopped (that is, the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D).

On the other hand, the first opening/closing gear 451 and the second opening/closing gear 452 are engaged with each other by the teeth 451c and 452c of the first opening/closing gear 451 and the second opening/closing gear 452. When the gear 461 is integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4 in the same phase, the rotation of the first opening/closing gear 451 is transmitted to the second opening/closing gear 452, and the second opening/closing gear 452 rotates to the back arm body. 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the second shaft 427 .

As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is shortened to the distance L2, and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (to approach the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26(c)). ). Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 27(d) and 30(b), the closed operation members 491 and 492 can be opened. That is, it is possible to open the closed operation members 491 and 492 by executing the opening/closing operation while holding the operation members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 27(d) and 30(b), after the operation members 491 and 492 are placed in the lowered position D and opened, the drive motor 430 (FIGS. 21 and 22) ) is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above-described case, and the first opening/closing gear 451 and the first rotating gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ4 to the rotation angle θ0. The operations (open/close and rotation) can be performed in reverse order.

27(d) and 30(b), the first opening/closing gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ3. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27(c), 29(c) and 30(a), the sliding between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 (Sliding) is used to stop the rotational motion of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D), the opening/closing second gear 452 rotates clockwise (clockwise). ), the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be enlarged to the distance L1, and the open operation members 491 and 492 can be closed. That is, it is possible to close the open operation members 491 and 492 by executing the opening/closing operation while holding the operation members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D. FIG.

27(c), 29(c), and 30(a), through the rotation angle θ2, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase. is rotated to the rotation angle .theta.1. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27(b) and 29(a), the rotating second gear 462 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) integrally with the back arm body 471 and front arm body 472, and the operating member 491, 492 are rotated from the lowered position D to the raised position U, and the second opening/closing gear 452 is not rotated relative to the back arm body 471 and front arm body 472, The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can be integrally rotated around the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, the operation members 491 and 492 can be moved from the lowered position D to the raised position U by rotating the operation members 491 and 492 while maintaining the closed state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation members 491 and 492 are started to rotate from the lowered position D toward the raised position U, only the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 are performed first. After that, the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated. 21 and 22), the transmission of the rotational driving force of the driving motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the second rotating gear 462 is interrupted, and then the rotational driving force of the driving motor 430 is transmitted to the second rotating gear 462. 462, it is possible to suppress the rotational driving force required for the driving motor 430 to start the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492. As a result, the size of the driving motor 430 can be reduced. be able to.

That is, when starting to rotate the motion members 491 and 492 in the stopped state (that is, the raised position U or the lowered position D), the motion members 491 and 492 move a stationary object. A force exceeding the generated inertial force must be applied to the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 is increased. In particular, the rotational motion of the operating members 491 and 992 is not limited only to the operating members 491 and 492, but also to the mechanical parts (for example, the slide rack member 481 and the pinion leg members 482 and 483) that open and close the operating members 491 and 492. etc.) and each of the arms 471 and 472 that hold the mechanism portion must be moved. Further, when rotating the operation members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D toward the raised position D, it is necessary to resist not only the inertial force but also the weight of the operation members 491 and 492 (action of gravity). . Therefore, the size of the drive motor 430 is increased.

On the other hand, after the operation members 491 and 492 start to rotate, inertia acts to maintain the state of motion of the operation members 491 and 492. The driving force is smaller than the rotational driving force required to initiate rotational movement of the motion members 491 and 492 . In other words, after the motion members 491 and 492 have started to move, it can be said that the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is being used.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, first, by utilizing the slippage (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462, the rotational driving force is is not transmitted to the rotating second gear 462 (disconnected state, state during transition from FIG. 30(b) to FIG. 30(a)), the drive motor 430 can be driven to rotate. Momentum (inertial force on the first rotation gear 461 side) can be imparted to the drive state. After that, when the first rotating gear 461 is meshed with the second rotating gear 462 (that is, a transmission state is formed) (see the transition from FIG. 29(c) to FIG. 29(b)), Rotational motion of the motion members 491 and 492 can be started in a state in which the driving motor 430 is rotationally driven. As a result, even if the drive motor 430 is downsized, the motion members 491 and 492 can be started to move. In other words, it is possible to prevent the use of the driving motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output after the operation members 491 and 492 start rotating.

In particular, the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 are performed in this blocking state, but in the opening and closing operations, the objects that are moved (moved or displaced) by the driving force of the drive motor 430 are only the operation members 491 and 492. It is not necessary to move the movement members 491 and 492 as well as the mechanical parts and the arms 471 and 472 as in the case of the rotary movement. Therefore, the load on the drive motor 430 is small, and the drive state can be given sufficient momentum (inertial force on the side of the rotating first gear 461).

The cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 are formed on both sides of the teeth 461c and 462c. A state (blocking state) in which the non-forming surface 462a is in contact with the surface 461a1 can be formed. Therefore, not only when the motion members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D start to move to the raised position U, but also when the motion members 491 and 492 in the raised position U start to move to the lowered position D Also, the drive state of the drive motor 430 can have momentum (inertial force).

From the state of rotation angle θ1 shown in FIGS. 27(b), 28(b), and 29(a), the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ0. . Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 28(a), the sliding between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is utilized. Then, while stopping the rotational motion of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 at the elevated position U), the clockwise (right) rotation of the opening/closing second gear 452 causes By shortening the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 to the distance L2, the closed operation members 491 and 492 can be opened. That is, the closed operation members 491 and 492 can be opened by executing the opening/closing operation while holding the operation members 491 and 492 at the raised position U.

As described above, according to the compound action unit 400 of the present embodiment, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) that rotate (rotate) around the second shaft 427 and The operating members 491 and 492 (second moving members) are provided on the arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and are opened and closed (opening and closing operations) in directions of approaching and separating from each other. ), the rotation of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is stopped (see FIGS. 28 and 30), while the moving members 491 and 492 (second moving member) are stopped. While the opening/closing operation is stopped, one drive motor 430 can perform a combined operation of rotating the back arm member 471 and the front arm member 472 (first moving member) (see FIG. 29).

Here, in the conventional game machine, when the moving motions of the first moving member and the second moving member are performed by one driving motor, the state in which the driving motor generates the driving force and the state in which the driving force is stopped occur. By forming two driving states, since the structure switches the operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. However, it is impossible to move one of the first moving member and the second moving member while stopping the other. Therefore, in order to move one of the first moving member and the second moving member while stopping the other, a driving motor for moving the first moving member and a driving motor for moving the second moving member must be used. It was necessary to provide each individually, ie, to provide a total of two drive motors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, one of the operating members 491 and 492 (second moving member) or the back arm body 471 and front arm body 472 (first moving member) is operated while the other is operated. Since one drive motor 430 can be used to stop the movement, the required number of drive motors 430 can be reduced while enhancing the effect of moving and stopping the movement members 491 and 492, thereby reducing the product cost. can be planned.

Next, the first joint operation unit 500 and the second joint operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45. FIG.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 with the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position; FIG. 31 and 32, the arrangement positions (opposing intervals) of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 are in a state in which both units 500 and 600 are accommodated in the rear case 210. It corresponds to the arrangement position (opposing interval).

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a first engagement member 539 that can be moved up and down via a slide mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 includes a link. A pair of second coupling members 630 are formed to be able to swing left and right via a mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 is arranged below the first coupling operation unit 500 with a predetermined spacing. A third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIGS. 31 and 32) of the space located between the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 facing each other. is set.

The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 move up and down and swing the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630, respectively, to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 31 or the retracted position shown in FIG. Place it in the binding position. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 31, the first engaging member 539 is lifted, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are left and right separated by tilting of the link mechanism, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is moved. The front side is left open (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 32, the first engaging member 539 is lowered and the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other by raising the link mechanism. Two connecting members 630 are arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 and connected to each other (see FIG. 12).

In this case, according to the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the first engaging member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged side by side on the left and right. When the lower surface 539e of the one engaging member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, a force acts on the pair of second coupling members 630 in a direction to bring them closer together. As a result, not only can the lower surface 539e of the first engaging member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 be brought into close contact, but also the facing surfaces of the pair of second coupling members 630 adjacent to each other on the left and right can be brought into close contact. can be made As a result, these connecting members 539 and 630 can be connected while suppressing formation of a gap between them. Therefore, it is possible to improve the rendering effect by combining a plurality of members.

First, the first joint operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 41. FIG.

33(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500, and FIG. 33(b) is a bottom view of the first coupling operation unit 500 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 33(a). 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500. FIG. 35, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a substrate member 510, a driving section 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 and generating a driving force, and a driving section 520. A slide mechanism portion 530 is displaced (lifted) vertically by receiving the driving force generated by the base member 510, and the driving force of the driving portion 520 is transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530. A first link member 541 arranged on the back side of the substrate member 510 and a second link member arranged on the back side of the substrate member 510 in a posture symmetrical with the first link member 541. 542, a pair of raised members 550 arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 on both sides of the slide mechanism 530, a decorative portion 560 arranged on the front side of the pair of raised members 550, and a substrate. and an urging spring 571 that is arranged on the front side of the member 510 and applies an urging force to the second link member 542 .

The raising member 550 is formed in a box-like shape with an open rear side, and the drive unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 can be accommodated in the inner space of the raising member 550 . As will be described later, even when the drive unit 520 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, the dead space formed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be effectively used. It is possible to reduce the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)).

The substrate member 510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape that is oblong when viewed from the front. 512, connecting grooves 513 and 514 formed on the left and right sides of a pair of guide grooves 511, pivot holes 515 formed on the sides of the connecting groove 513, and the front side and the back side of the substrate member 510, respectively. and a support shaft 516 projecting therefrom.

The guide groove 511 allows the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to be inserted from the front side to the rear side of the substrate member 510, so that the insertion shaft 531c and the link members 541 and 542 can be connected on the rear side of the substrate member 510. A pair of groove-like openings are arranged in parallel with each other and extend linearly along the vertical direction at substantially the center in the width direction of the substrate member 510 . The groove width of the guide groove 511 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530, so that the insertion shaft 531c can be moved only along the direction in which the guide groove 511 extends. That is, the slide mechanism part 530 can move (elevate) in the vertical direction along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 by guiding the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism part 530 to the guide groove 511 .

The rack portion 512 is a portion formed as a rack gear having a plurality of teeth 512 a carved on a plane along the extension direction of the guide groove 511 , and is fixed to the front side of the substrate member 510 . When the slide mechanism portion 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510 , the pinion gear 537 (see FIG. 38) of the slide mechanism portion 530 meshes with the teeth 512 a of the rack portion 512 . Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved (lifted/lowered) along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 , the pinion gear 537 is rotationally driven with the movement of the slide mechanism portion 530 .

The connecting groove 513 is a groove-like shape for inserting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510 and connecting the connecting shaft 526 and the first link member 541 on the back side of the substrate member 510 . , which is curved and extended in a convex circular arc shape toward the guide groove 511 . Specifically, the connecting groove 513 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of an annular shape centering on the axial center of the shaft support hole 515 . The width of the connecting groove 513 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 526 of the driving portion 520 , so that the connecting shaft 526 can move only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513 .

The shaft support hole 515 is an opening through which a support shaft 527 that supports the base end of the first link member 541 is inserted, and is arranged on the opposite side of the guide groove 511 with the connection groove 513 interposed therebetween. As will be described later, the support shaft 527 is fixed to the case body 521 of the drive unit 520, and the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 so that the tip of the support shaft 527 is a shaft support hole. It protrudes to the rear side of the substrate member 510 via 515 . The base end side of the first link member 541 is pivotally supported by a support shaft 527 protruding through the pivot hole 515 and is rotated about the support shaft 527 .

The connection groove 514 is formed by inserting the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 from the back side to the front side of the board member 510, and forming the end of the biasing spring 542 on the locking claw 542b on the front side of the board member 510. It is a groove-shaped opening for guiding the guide groove 511 and is curved and extended in a convex circular arc shape toward the guide groove 511 . That is, the connecting groove 514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows movement of the locking claw 542b when the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516. As shown in FIG.

The support shaft 516 is a shaft for supporting the second link member 542 and the biasing spring 571, and as described above, protrudes from the front side and the back side of the board member 510 respectively. The support shaft 516 is arranged at a position that is symmetrical with the shaft support hole 515 with an imaginary straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a line of symmetry. The second link member 542 has its base end side (shaft support hole 542 a ) pivotally supported by a support shaft 516 projecting from the rear side of the substrate member 510 , and is rotated about the support shaft 516 . Also, the biasing spring 571 is held by a support shaft 516 projecting from the front side of the substrate member 510 .

The biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring. It is locked by the locking claw 542 b and the other arm is locked by the locking claw 517 of the substrate member 510 . The biasing spring 571 is disposed in a state in which the pair of arms are elastically deformed in a direction toward each other, and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 571 pushes up the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 (Fig. 34 and the upper side of FIG. 35). That is, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts in the direction of holding the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG.

The drive unit 520 is a unit for generating a driving force for vertically sliding (lifting) the slide mechanism unit 530 , and is located on the front side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530 . are placed. Here, the driving section 520 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 .

FIG. 36 is a rear view of drive unit 520. FIG. In FIG. 36, the positions of the connecting groove 513 and the shaft support hole 515 of the substrate member 510 with the drive unit 520 assembled to the substrate member 510 are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 36, the drive unit 520 includes a case body 521 and a drive motor 522 (FIGS. 34 and 34) which is disposed on the front side of the case body 521 and projects the drive shaft to the back side of the case body 521. 35), a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a rotating shaft 524a that meshes with the pinion gear 523 and protrudes from the rear surface of the case body 521 and is rotatably supported. A crank gear 524, a connecting rod 525 whose one end is rotatably supported by the crank gear 524 via a rotating shaft 525a, a connecting shaft 526 projecting from the other end of the connecting rod 525, and a case body 521 and a support shaft 527 protruding from the rear surface of the . The drive shaft of the drive motor 522, the rotary shafts 524a and 525a, the connecting shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are arranged in parallel.

A rotating shaft 525a that rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 525 to the crank gear 524 is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524, and a connection that protrudes from the other end of the connecting rod 525. As described above, the shaft 526 is inserted through the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510 and is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513 . Therefore, the crank gear 524 , the rotating shaft 525 a and the connecting rod 525 constitute a crank mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the crank gear 524 into the reciprocating motion of the connecting shaft 526 via the connecting rod 525 .

That is, when the pinion gear 523 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522, and the crank gear 524 is rotated in one direction (for example, the direction of arrow A1), the connecting shaft 526 extends along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. While being displaced in one direction (direction of arrow B1) by driving motor 522, when crank gear 524 is rotated in the other direction (direction of arrow A2) by driving motor 522 in the opposite direction, the direction of movement of connecting shaft 526 is reversed. , and the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the other direction (arrow B2 direction) along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513 .

It should be noted that when the drive unit 520 (case body 521) is assembled to the front side of the substrate member 510, the connecting shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are inserted into the connecting groove 513 and the support hole 515 of the substrate member 510, respectively, as described above. The tip of the connecting shaft 526 and the tip of the support shaft 527 are protruded to the rear side of the substrate member 510 (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

In this case, the connecting shaft 526 is rotatably connected to the longitudinal intermediate portion (connecting hole 541b) of the first link member 541, and the support shaft 527 is rotatably connected to the base end portion (shaft support hole 541a) of the first link member 541. 35), the drive motor 522 rotates to displace the connecting shaft 526 along the connecting groove 513 (in the direction of the arrow B1 or in the direction of the arrow B2). 527 can be rotated.

Returning to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35, description will be made. The first link member 541 is a member for connecting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive section 520 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism section 530 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism section 530. It is formed in the shape of a square plate. The first link member 541 has a pivot hole 541a at its proximal end, a connecting hole 541b at its longitudinal intermediate portion, and a slide hole 541c at its distal end opposite to the proximal end.

The shaft support hole 541a and the connection hole 541b are formed as circular through holes when viewed from the front, and the shaft support shaft 527 and the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 are rotatably inserted therethrough. On the other hand, the sliding hole 541c is formed as a through hole having an elongated hole shape in a front view with the major diameter direction along the longitudinal direction of the first link member 541, and is slidable along the elongated hole shape (longer diameter direction). The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is inserted.

Therefore, when the first link member 541 rotates about the support hole 541a in the direction of raising the slide hole 541c (direction of arrow B1, see FIG. While being displaced upward along the guide groove 511, the slide mechanism portion 530 is lifted, the first link member 541 moves down the slide hole 541c around the support hole 541a (arrow B2 direction, see FIG. 36). 40 and 41, the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is displaced downward along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

Here, in this embodiment, the connecting rod 525 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510, and the first link member 541 is arranged on the rear side of the substrate member 510, and the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are arranged. Since they are connected (connected) to each other through the connecting groove 513 of the base member 510, they are connected to the driving force transmission path formed by the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (that is, the rotary shaft 524a of the crank gear 524). The length of the portion that connects the shaft 526 (connecting rod 525) and the portion that connects the connecting shaft 526 and the insertion shaft 531c (the portion from the connecting hole 541b of the first link member 541 to the sliding hole 541c) ) becomes longer. Therefore, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 may be deformed when transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 522, and the driving force may not be stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base end side (shaft support hole 541a) of the first link member 541 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 527 on the rear surface of the substrate member 510. To increase the rigidity of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 as a whole by utilizing the rigidity of the case body 521 of the driving part 520 to which the shaft 527 is fixed and the board member 510 to which the case body 521 is fastened and fixed. can be done. As a result, deformation of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 is suppressed when transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 522, and the driving force is stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). can do.

In particular, in this embodiment, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (shaft support hole 541a) of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are rotatably supported on the substrate member 510. As compared with the case where the substrate member 510 supports the slide mechanism 530 (the insertion shaft 531c), the transmission path of the driving force can be shortened. Transmission to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be further stabilized.

The second link member 542 is a member for connecting the biasing spring 571 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to transmit the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530. formed into a shape. Similarly to the first link member 541, the second link member 542 is formed with a pivot hole 542a and a slide hole 542c at the proximal end and the distal end, respectively. The support shaft 516 of the substrate member 510 is rotatably inserted through the shaft support hole 542a, and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism section 530 is inserted through the slide hole 542c. A locking claw 542b is formed in the middle portion of the second link member 542 in the longitudinal direction. The locking claw 542b is arranged on the front side of the board member 510 via the connecting groove 514 and locks the arm of the biasing spring 571, as described above.

Therefore, the second link member 542 and the first link member 541 hold the slide mechanism portion 530 symmetrically, so that the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably displaced. Further, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts on the slide mechanism portion 530 in the upward direction (the direction in which the distal end side (sliding hole 542c) of the second link member 542 is lifted) via the second link member 542. Therefore, the driving force of the driving portion 520 can be assisted when the slide mechanism portion 530 is lifted. As a result, an increase in size of the drive motor 522 can be suppressed.

The support shafts 527 and 516 inserted through the shaft support holes 541a and 542a of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are fitted with retaining rings E formed as E-rings to prevent them from coming off. , the insertion shaft 531c inserted through the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 has a bearing surface ( A fastening screw with head or washer) is tightened (see FIG. 35).

Here, with respect to the first link member 541, attachment of a retaining ring E as a retaining ring to the connecting shaft 526 inserted through the connecting hole 541b of the first link member 541 or fastening of a fastening screw is omitted. That is, by applying a retainer to two of the three shafts (the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c), it is possible to omit the retainer for the remaining one (the connecting shaft 526). It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for retention. In particular, the two shafts on the base end side and the tip end side of the long first link member 541 are retained, and the shaft at the intermediate position between the base end side and the tip end side is retained. is omitted, the first link member 451 can be stably rotated while suppressing the shaft (connecting shaft 526) omitting the stopper from slipping out of the connecting hole 541b.

As described above, the slide mechanism portion 530 is a mechanism portion that slides (elevates) in the vertical direction along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first engaging member 539 thereof is lowered to a predetermined position. , to be coupled to the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 (see FIG. 32). Here, the slide mechanism section 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG.

37(a) is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism section 530, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism section 530. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the disassembled slide mechanism 530 viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism 530 viewed from the back. be.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the slide mechanism section 530 includes an A-layer base plate 531, a B-layer base plate 532 and a B-layer decorative body 533, a C-layer base plate 534 and a C-layer decorative body 535, and a A first pinion gear 537, a second pinion gear 538, and a first coupling member 539 are provided, and the first coupling member 539 is slid vertically by driving force transmitted from the driving portion 520 via the first link member 541 ( lift).

According to the slide mechanism portion 530 of the present embodiment, two pairs of double rack and pinion structures are interposed between the A layer base plate 531 and the first coupling member 539, and the first link member 541 is connected to the A layer base. The driving force received by the plate 531 is transmitted to the first coupling member 539 via the two sets of double rack and pinion structures, thereby accelerating the sliding displacement (lifting) of the first coupling member 539. is configured to allow

The A-layer base plate 531 includes a body portion 531a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 531b that is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 531a. , a plurality of insertion shafts 531c (six in total in this embodiment) that protrude from the rear surface of the body portion 531a and are arranged side by side on both sides of the guide groove 531b; and a support shaft 531 d that rotatably supports the first pinion gear 537 .

The A-layer base plate 531 has a plurality of insertion shafts 531c inserted through the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, and a collar C having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide groove 511 at the tip of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. is fastened and fixed as a retainer so that it can be slidably displaced (lifted and lowered) on the substrate member 510 (see FIG. 35). In this case, the first pinion gear 537 supported by the support shaft 531 d is meshed with the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 .

In this embodiment, two insertion shafts 531c out of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted through the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 as described above. Tighten a fastening screw to the tip of the top to prevent it from coming off.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are positioned above (the upper side in FIG. 39) the center of the A-layer base plate 531 in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 39). Therefore, as will be described later, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is tilted forward on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward tilted posture is changed to the collar C, the first link member 541, and the second link member 541. The 2-link member 542 can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A-layer base plate 531) can be stably slid and displaced (lifted and lowered).

The B-layer base plate 532 includes a main body portion 532a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of insertion holes 532b formed through the main body portion 532a, and a plurality of through holes 532b protruding from the rear surface of the main body portion 532a. and a rack portion 532d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as rack gears along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 532a on the side surface of the body portion 532a.

In the B-layer base plate 532, a plurality of insertion shafts 532c are inserted into the guide grooves 531b of the A-layer base plate 531, and fastening screws are fastened to the ends of the inserted insertion shafts 532c to prevent them from coming off. It is held by the A-layer base plate 531 so as to be slidably displaceable (up and down).

In this case, the rack portion 532d provided on the side surface of the B-layer base plate 532 (body portion 532a) meshes with the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the A-layer base plate 531 (support shaft 531d). That is, the first pinion gear 537 is meshed with both the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 and the rack portion 532d of the B layer base plate 532, thereby forming a first set of double rack and pinion structure. Therefore, when the A-layer base plate 531 is slid (lifted) with respect to the substrate member 510, the B-layer base plate 532 is moved with respect to the A-layer base plate 531 via the first pair of double rack and pinion structures. Slide displacement (up and down) is performed. That is, the B-layer base plate 532 is slidably displaced (lifted/lowered) with respect to the substrate member 510 while being accelerated relative to the A-layer base plate 531 .

The B-layer decorative body 533 is a member forming a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the B-layer base plate 532, and is integrated with the B-layer base plate 532 for sliding displacement (up and down). be done. Specifically, the B-layer decoration 533 has a plurality of insertion shafts 533a protruding from its rear surface, and fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 532b of the B-layer base plate 532 are fastened to the insertion shafts 533a. By doing so, it is fixed to the front side of the B-layer base plate 532 .

The plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B-layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 539b of the first coupling member 539 and the guide grooves 534b of the C-layer base plate 534, and then fixed to the B-layer base plate 532. . In this case, one insertion shaft 532a of the plurality of insertion shafts 532a of the B-layer decorative body 533 rotatably supports the second pinion gear 538. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are slid (lifted and lowered) with respect to the A layer base plate 531, the second pinion gear 538 is also slid (lifted and lowered) with respect to the A layer base plate 531. ) is done.

The C-layer base plate 534 includes a main body portion 534a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 534b that is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 534a. , a plurality of insertion holes 534c penetrating through the body portion 534a, and a rack portion 534d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as rack gears along guide grooves 534b on the front side of the body portion 532a.

The C-layer decoration body 535 is a member that forms a decoration portion that is visually recognized by the player from the front side, is fixed to the C-layer base plate 534, and is integrated with the C-layer base plate 534 for sliding displacement (up and down). be done. Specifically, the C-layer decoration body 535 has a plurality of insertion shafts 535a protruding from its rear surface, and fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 534c of the C-layer base plate 534 are fastened to the insertion shafts 535a. By doing so, it is fixed to the front side of the C-layer base plate 534 .

The first coupling member 539 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visually recognized by the player from the front side, and that contacts the pair of second coupling members 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 to form a coupled state. There are (see FIG. 32) a main body portion 539a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 539b that is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 539a. , and a rack portion 539d in which a plurality of teeth are carved as a rack gear along a guide groove 539b on the rear side of the main body portion 532a.

A lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is formed by combining two flat surfaces that slope downward toward the center. That is, the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is formed in an inverted V shape in which the center thereof protrudes in the downward direction (downward in FIG. 38) when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 40 and 41). ). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) contacts the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32).

In addition, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is provided with a concave portion 539e1 having a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view at the center thereof. A protrusion 630a1 protruding from the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 is housed in the recess 539e1 (fitted into recesses and protrusions) at the coupling position. Due to this concave-convex fitting, the relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position.

The plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B-layer decorative body 533 are inserted through the guide grooves 534b and 539b of the C-layer base plate 534 and the first connecting member 539, respectively. , and held between the B-layer decorative body 533 and the B-layer base plate 532 so as to be slidable (liftable).

In this case, the second pinion gear 538 pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 is connected to the rack portion 534d provided on the front side of the C layer base plate 534 (body portion 534a) and the first coupling member. 539 (main body portion 539a) and the rack portion 539d disposed on the back side thereof are meshed with each other, thereby forming a second set of double rack and pinion structure. Therefore, when the B-layer base plate 532 (and the B-layer decorative body 533) is slid (lifted and lowered) with respect to the A-layer base plate 531, the first coupling member is moved through the second set of double rack and pinion mechanisms. 539 is slid with respect to the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decorative body 533). That is, the first coupling member 539 is slid (lifted/lowered) with respect to the substrate member 510 while being accelerated relative to the B-layer base plate 532 .

Returning to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35, description will be made. As described above, the first coupling member 500 has the slide mechanism portion 530 arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510, and a plurality of (this embodiment 6) are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, and a collar C is attached to some (four) of the plurality of inserted shafts 531c. While it is mounted as a retainer, the remaining (two) insertion shafts 531c are connected to the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 (see FIG. 35).

Here, also in the conventional game machine, a moving member (corresponding to the slide mechanism portion 530) is provided with a plurality of insertion shafts (corresponding to the insertion shaft 531c), and these plurality of insertion shafts are connected to the substrate member (corresponding to the substrate member 510). ) is inserted into the guide groove (corresponding to the guide groove 511), and the moving member is slidably displaced along the guide groove by the driving force of the drive means (corresponding to the drive portion 520).

In this case, in order to stably slide the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of insertion shafts that are inserted through the guide grooves. On the other hand, if the number of insertion shafts is increased, the number of parts (corresponding to collars C) for holding the insertion shafts (preventing them from coming off from the guide grooves) also increases, resulting in an increase in cost. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing costs while making it possible to stabilize the sliding displacement of the moving member.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (A-layer base plate 531) is arranged on the front side where the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged. The first link member 541 is attached to one insertion shaft 531c of a plurality of insertion shafts 531c projecting from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. Since the first link member 541 is connected, one of the collars C for preventing the insertion shafts 531c from coming off from the guide grooves 511 can also be used as the first link member 541 . As a result, the number of insertion shafts 531c is ensured, and the parts (collar C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c can be stabilized while the sliding displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A-layer base plate 531) can be stabilized. Cost can be reduced by reducing the number of points.

In particular, in this embodiment, the guide groove 511 is formed between the second link member 542 and the first link member 541 on the rear side of the substrate member 510 opposite to the front side where the slide mechanism section 530 is arranged. Since the second link member 542 is arranged symmetrically on both sides and is connected to one insertion shaft 531c out of a plurality of insertion shafts 531c projecting from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542, the support reaction force received by the slide mechanism portion 530 is made symmetrical. 1 collar C can also be used by the second link member 542, so that the number of insertion shafts 531c can be secured and the slide displacement of the slide mechanism part 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized. However, the cost can be further reduced by reducing the number of parts (collar C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c.

Thus, in this embodiment, by arranging the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 on the back side of the substrate member 510, stabilization of slide displacement and cost reduction are achieved. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the crank mechanism (the crank gear 524, the connecting rod 525, and the connecting shaft 526) is configured in the driving portion 520, and the connecting groove 513 is formed in the base member 510. By connecting the connecting shaft 526 to the first link member 541 , the driving section 520 can be arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 . As a result, the constituent elements of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be concentrated on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the limited space can be effectively utilized and the constituent elements can be efficiently arranged. As a result, the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced.

In particular, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the decorative portion 560 is disposed on the front side of the slide mechanism portion 530, so that the slide mechanism portion 530 and the decorative portion 560 move forward and backward (vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)). , and the dimension in the front-rear direction increases accordingly. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the drive unit 520 can be arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 as described above, so that the drive unit 520 can be arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510. It can be arranged in a dead space formed on the side of the slide mechanism part 530 . That is, two relatively large elements of the slide mechanism portion 530 and the drive portion 520 can be arranged side by side in the left-right direction. As a result, the dead space in the limited space can be effectively utilized, and the size reduction of the first coupling operation unit 500 particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)) can be achieved.

Furthermore, in this case, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the first link member 541 is arranged on the back side of the substrate member 510 with the support shaft 527 as the center. Since it is a rotated structure, the space for the movement of the first link member 541 can be planar. That is, the space for moving the first link member 541 can be secured in the planar space on the back side of the substrate member 510, and it is necessary to secure a large space in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)). There is no Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 particularly in the front-rear direction.

The same applies to the second link member 542. By utilizing the connecting groove 514, the biasing spring 571 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, effectively utilizing the dead space described above, The space for the movement of the second link member 542 can also be planar, and as a result, the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced especially in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)). can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41, the operation of the first combined operation unit 500 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 34 to 39 will be referred to as needed.

40(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 with the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position. 5 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 500 in a folded state; FIG. 41(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 with the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 41(b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. 5 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 500 in a folded state; FIG. 40 and 41, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are omitted for the sake of simplification and easier understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), when the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of the arrow A1 in the drive unit 520 causes the connecting rod 525 to rotate. As a result, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B1 (see FIG. 36), and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 raise the slide holes 541c and 542c around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a. It is placed in a posture rotated in the direction (upward in FIG. 40(b)). Therefore, the A-layer base plate 531 (FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged on the upper end side (the upper side in FIG. 40B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first coupling member 539 is lifted. A state is formed (the retracted position is arranged).

In this case, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is applied to the second link member 542 as described above. The biasing force of the biasing spring 571 changes the posture of the second link member 542 to the posture shown in FIG. ). Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 40(a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be in a stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is vertically moved. Even when vibration is generated, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 can be used to quickly converge the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction.

From the state shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), when the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B2 through the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of arrow A2 in the drive unit 520, (See FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are rotated about the pivot holes 541a and 542a in the direction of lowering the slide holes 541c and 542c (downward in FIG. 40(b)). . As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (Figs. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move downward about the pivot holes 541a and 542a in the direction of lowering the sliding holes 541c and 542c. By further rotating, the A-layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 531c) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged on the lower end side of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510 (lower side in FIG. 41(b)), so that the first coupling member A state in which 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged) is formed.

41(a) and 41(b), in the drive unit 520, the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of the arrow A1 displaces the connecting shaft 526 in the direction of the arrow B1 through the connecting rod 525. As a result (see FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move in a direction (upward in FIG. 41(b)) in which the slide holes 541c and 542c are raised around the pivot holes 541a and 542a. rotated. As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is lifted along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (Figs. 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the first coupling member 539 is arranged (returned) to the retracted position.

According to this embodiment, since the slide mechanism portion 530 has a structure in which the first coupling member 539 is slidably displaced in the vertical direction via two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms, the sliding displacement of the first coupling member 539 can be It can be faster. On the other hand, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41A to the retracted position shown in FIG. , must also be lifted against the action of gravity, increasing the load on the drive motor 522 (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 changes the posture of the second link member 542 to the posture shown in FIG. It acts in the direction of holding the slide hole 542c in the position rotated in the upward direction. Therefore, when the first connecting member 539 is raised from the connecting position shown in FIG. 41(a) to the retracted position shown in FIG. 40(a) against the action of gravity, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is assisted. Since it can be used as a force, the drive force required for the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 520 can be reduced accordingly, and the capacity can be reduced.

Here, the substrate member 510 is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the guide grooves 511 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 40 and 41). Specifically, the lower end side of the guide groove 511 protrudes toward the front side (front side, front side of the paper surface of FIG. 40(a) (retracted to the rear side of the paper surface)). As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 disposed on the front side of the base member 510 can assume a forward tilting posture (a posture tilted so as to fall in a direction away from the front side of the base member 510 (forward side)) due to its own weight. Therefore, the load on the collar C can be reduced accordingly, and the durability can be improved.

However, since the slide mechanism portion 530 is configured by overlapping its elements (for example, the A-layer base plate 531, the B-layer base plate 532, the C-layer base plate 534, etc.), the vertical direction of the substrate member 510 If the inclination is too large, the elements of the slide mechanism 530 are likely to come into close contact with each other, increasing the sliding resistance during the sliding displacement. Therefore, the above-described inclination cannot be made sufficiently large, so that the collar C is subjected to a relatively large load.

In this case, in this embodiment, the substrate member 510 is interposed between the slide mechanism portion 530 and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 that are coupled (connected) to the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. Therefore, the forward tilting posture of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be restricted not only by the collar C but also by the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 . As a result, the load on the collar C can be suppressed, the durability thereof can be improved, and the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably slid and displaced (lifted and lowered).

In particular, as described above, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are positioned above the longitudinal center of the A-layer base plate 531 (see FIG. 39). Therefore, when the slide mechanism part 530 is tilted forward on the front side of the board member 510 due to its own weight, the tilted position is changed by the collar C, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. This can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A-layer base plate 531) can be stably slid and displaced (lifted and lowered).

Next, the second coupling operation unit 600 arranged below the first coupling operation unit 500 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG.

42 is a front perspective view of the second coupling operation unit 600. FIG. 43(a) is a front view of the second coupling operation unit 600, and FIG. 43(b) is a rear view of the second coupling operation unit 600. FIG. In addition, illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted in FIG. 43(a). 42 and 43 illustrate a state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the second coupling operation unit 600 has a back case body 611 and a front case body 612, and the base ends thereof are rotatably supported by the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, respectively. linking means (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622), a second coupling member 630 rotatably supported on the distal end side of each of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622, and the inner link member 621 and a drive motor 640 that generates a driving force for displacing the outer link member 622, and transmission means (a pinion gear 651 and a transmission gear 652).

In this embodiment, a pair of pairs of link means, second coupling member 630, drive motor 640, and transmission means are arranged on the left and right sides of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, respectively. . In this case, the group arranged on the left side and the group arranged on the right side of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are arranged in the width direction of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 (left and right in FIG. 43(a)). Direction) Except for the fact that they are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the imaginary line passing through the center and that the shape of the decorative portion is different, they have substantially the same configuration, so the same reference numerals are used for description.

The back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are plate-shaped members made of a resin material. It accommodates the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) and the transmission means (the pinion gear 651 and the transmission gear 652).

A pair of guide grooves 611 a curved in an arc shape are formed in the back case body 611 . The guide groove 611a is curved in an arc shape centering on a base end shaft 621a, which will be described later (that is, formed into a shape obtained by cutting a part of an annular shape centering on the base end shaft 621a). A collar 621d rotatably supported on the rear surface of is fitted inside. The width of the guide groove 611a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the collar 621d. Therefore, as will be described later, when the inner link member 621 is rotated about the base end shaft 621a, the inner link member 621 ( and the rotation of the outer link member 622) can be stabilized. As a result, the positional accuracy of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position can be enhanced.

The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotatably supported on the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 through base end shafts 621a and 622a at their base end sides, while their tip end sides are at the tip shafts 621b and 621b. It is rotatably pivoted to the second coupling member 630 via 622b.

In this case, the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 have the same distance between the proximal shafts 621a and 622a and the distance between the distal shafts 621b and 622b, and the proximal shafts 621a and the distance between the distal axis 621b and the distance between the proximal axis 622a and the distal axis 622b are made equal to form a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, when the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotated around the base end shafts 621a and 622a, the second coupling member 630 does not have a center of rotation and is parallel (that is, shown in FIG. 43(a)). (while maintaining the posture to move).

The second coupling member 630 is a member that forms a decoration visible to the player from the front side and is coupled to the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32). An upper surface 630a with which 539e abuts and a facing surface 630b with which the other second coupling member 630 abuts when they are adjacent to each other are formed.

The upper surface 630a is formed as a flat surface that slopes downward toward the opposing surface 630b when viewed from the front of the second coupling member 630 shown in FIG. 43, and the opposing surface 630b is formed as a flat surface that is parallel to the vertical direction. be done. Therefore, when the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought into contact with each other at the coupling position, the front view shape of the upper surface 630a side of the pair of second coupling members 630 changes to a V shape with a concave center. It is formed into a shape (see FIG. 44(b)). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) abuts against each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32).

In addition, on the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, convex portions 630a1 each having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view protrude from the opposing surface 630b side. The convex portion 630a1 is housed in a concave portion 539e1 formed in the lower surface 539e of the first connecting member 539 (corrugated fitting) at the connecting position. As described above, this concave-convex fitting can restrict the relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. Here, the thickness dimension of the projection 630a1 is made smaller toward the projecting tip. Therefore, when the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 are coupled (contacted) to the lower surfaces 539e of the first coupling members 539, it is possible to facilitate the insertion (fitting) of the projections 630a1 into the recesses 539e1. can.

A gear portion 621 c is integrally formed on the proximal end side of the inner link member 621 . The gear portion 621c is formed in a fan shape projecting radially outward from the base end shaft 621a, and a plurality of teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the fan shape. A transmission gear 652, which will be described later, is meshed with the gear portion 621c.

The drive motor 640 is arranged on the rear side of the back case body 611 , and a pinion gear 651 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 640 projecting from the front side of the back case body 611 . The pinion gear 651 is meshed with the transmission gear 652, and the transmission gear 652 is meshed with the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621 as described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, the operation of the second coupling operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 43(a) will be referred to as appropriate.

44(a) and 44(b) are front views of the second coupling operation unit 600, and illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. 44(a), the state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position is shown in FIG. 44(b). Each state is illustrated.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 43(a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are tilted away from each other, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are left and right separated. When the left and right drive motors 640 are driven to rotate from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. , and the gear portion 621c rotates around the base end shaft 621a. As a result, the left and right inner link members 621 are rotated about the base end shaft 621a, respectively, and the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) approach each other as shown in FIG. 44(a). direction.

When the left and right drive motors 640 are further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44(a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) approach each other as shown in FIG. 44(b). The pair of second coupling members 630 are placed at the coupling position. That is, the pair of second coupling members 630 are laterally adjacent to each other, and the opposing surfaces 630b are in contact with each other. On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 44(b), when the drive motor 640 is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the above case, the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) move away from each other. 43(a), the pair of second coupling members 630 is retracted to the retracted position.

Returning to FIGS. 31 and 32, the coupling operations of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 45 will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45 is a front view model diagram of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position.

As described above, the first coupling member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are moved from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. The members 630 are brought close to each other by raising the link mechanism and arranged side by side on the left and right. 4, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surface 630a of each of the pair of second coupling members 630. As shown in FIG.

Here, in the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 are inclined at an angle θ with respect to the horizontal plane. It is said that Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is lowered (slide displaced) along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 45), the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. The vertical force F is composed of a force component Fv (=F×cos θ) in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a and a force component Fp (=F×sin θ) in a direction parallel to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a. can be decomposed. Here, the force F is approximated as a concentrated load acting on the center of the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 in the width direction.

In this case, in this embodiment, the angle θ of the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a with respect to the horizontal plane is set to be smaller than the angle α of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 with respect to the vertical direction. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the action direction of the force component Fv is extended from the center of the upper surface 630a in the width direction as a starting point, the extension line extends to the inner side of the base end shaft 622a of the outer link member 622 (the inner link member 621 base end shaft 621a side).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged side by side on the left and right at the coupling position, and the direction (vertical direction) substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other. The first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the second coupling member 630 from the vertical direction in FIG. Then, a force can be generated in a direction to bring the pair of second coupling members 630 closer to each other in the adjacent direction. As a result, not only can the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 be coupled together, but also the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled together. By connecting the first connecting member 539 and the pair of second connecting members 630), it is possible to ensure a dramatic effect.

That is, even in the conventional game machine, a pair of members are movably provided, and the pair of members are retracted to different retracted positions, respectively, and moved from the different retracted positions to be arranged at the coupling position. There is a method in which the members are joined together (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-115300). In this case, if a gap is formed between the pair of members at the joint position and the joint is not properly performed, the presentation effect of joining the pair of members is impaired. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the pair of members are symmetrical, it is relatively easy to connect the pair of members face-to-face. That is, it was difficult to combine them while suppressing the occurrence of gaps.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 abuts against the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, the pair of Since a force can be generated in a direction to bring the second coupling members 630 closer to each other in the adjacent direction, a gap is generated between the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. In addition, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630, and to couple these members to each other. That is, three or more members can be properly connected to each other, and the production effect by the connection can be ensured.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 has a front view shape (see FIGS. 32 and 45), the first coupling member 539 is a front view on the side of the lower surface 539e (the lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape (the shape illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 45) corresponds to the shape of the pair of second coupling members 630, and the center protrudes downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45).

Therefore, as described above, at the reference position, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 so that the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 faces the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. When abutted against each other, the first coupling member 539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 630 due to the recessed shape and the protruded shape, and the first coupling member 539 moves between the pair of second coupling members 630 . are pushed apart from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b).

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, so that the pair of second coupling members By forming a force in a direction to bring the two members 630 closer to each other, the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled while suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the opposing surfaces 630b. As a result, the game can be operated in a manner different from the expectation of the player, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57, the circular motion unit 700 will be described.

FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the ring motion unit 700 with the ring forming member 790 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of operation unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the ring motion unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790 that are raised and lowered and rotated via link members 770. As described above, the opening 211a (third symbol display) It is arranged in the back case 210 at a position below the device 81 (see FIG. 2) and on the back side of the rotary operation unit 300 (see FIGS. 6 to 9). The ring motion unit 700 raises and lowers the pair of ring forming members 790 while rotating them, and arranges them in the retracted position shown in FIG. 46 or the coupling position shown in FIG.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 46, the pair of ring forming members 790 are moved downward while being separated from each other to the left and right, and the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is opened (FIG. 6). reference). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 47, the pair of ring forming members 790 are rotated in a direction approaching each other and lifted upward. An annular shape is formed on the front side of 81 (see FIG. 10).

In this case, according to the ring operation unit 700, when the pair of ring forming members 790 are lifted upward and arranged at the coupling position, the ring forming members 790 are mechanically moved to the coupling position (raised position). As a result, the energy consumption of the driving motor 740 required for holding the pair of ring forming members 790 at the coupling position can be suppressed.

FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the annular motion unit 700 viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded view of the annular motion unit 700 viewed from the back. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the annular motion unit 700 includes an intermediate case body 710, a rear case body 720 arranged on the back side of the intermediate case body 710, and a side opposite to the back case 720. A front case body 730 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, a drive motor 740 disposed in the intermediate case 710 and generating a rotational driving force, and a rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted. A gear group (first gear 751 to sixth gear 756) for the gear group, a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762) that converts the rotary motion transmitted through the gear group into linear motion, and its A pair of link members 770 whose base ends are rotatably supported by a pair of racks 762 in a rack and pinion mechanism, a lift base body 780 whose tip ends of the pair of link members 770 are supported, and its lift base It mainly includes a pair of ring-forming members 790 whose proximal ends are rotatably supported on the body 780 .

The intermediate case body 710 holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism rotatably and slidably between it and the rear case body 720 arranged on the rear side, and the front case body arranged on the front side. 730 , the base end of the link member 770 is held slidably displaceable. and a projecting portion 713 projecting upward from the upper edge of the main body portion 711 .

The insertion grooves 712 allow the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) to be inserted therethrough, and the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 inserted therethrough are inserted into the insertion grooves 712. It is a groove-like opening for passing through the insertion holes 762c of the pair of racks 762 on the back side of the body portion 711, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 711. As shown in FIG. The groove width of the insertion groove 712 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 .

The projecting portion 713 is a portion for contacting the rear surface of the link member 770 to suppress the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the page of FIG. , and is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view that widens (widens in width) from the tip of the overhang toward the upper edge of the body portion 711, and the front face 713a thereof is the front face 711a of the body portion 711. They are formed so as to be flush with each other (smoothly connected without steps and parallel to each other).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) toward the upright state, the front surface 713a of the projecting portion 713 contacts the back surface of the link member 770 (see FIGS. 47 and 56). ), and when the link member 770 is in the upright state, the link member 770 can be sandwiched between the front surface 713a of the projecting portion 713 and the column portion 732 of the case body 730 (see FIG. 47). . As a result, the link member 770 can be brought into contact with the link member 770 in the upright state and its vicinity, in which the posture of the link member 770 tends to be particularly unstable, so that the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

It should be noted that the edge of the projecting portion 713 is curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front. Therefore, as the link member 770 is erected (that is, as its posture becomes more likely to become unstable), the area of the front surface 713a of the projecting portion 713 that can contact the rear surface of the link member 770 can be enlarged. While the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed, the area of the projecting portion 713 that is visible from the front can be made smaller, thereby suppressing deterioration of the appearance.

A head portion 713b formed at the tip of the overhanging portion 713 (the upper side in FIGS. 48 and 49) protrudes forward (forward). It is connected to the top of the pillar 732 . Therefore, as will be described later, when the pair of link members 770 are erected upright, the head portion 713b of the projecting portion 713 is interposed between the pair of link members 770 facing each other.

The rear case body 720 is a member that rotatably and slidably holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism between itself and the intermediate case body 710. An insertion groove 722 opened in the body portion 721, a front end guide groove 723 and a rear end guide groove 724 arranged parallel to the insertion groove 722, and a group of gears (second gear 752 to sixth gear 756). and a plurality of shafts 725 that rotatably support pinion gears 761, respectively.

The insertion grooves 722 are inserted through the insertion shafts 772 of the link members 770 protruding from the rear surface of the rack 762 (that is, the insertion shafts 772 are inserted through the insertion holes 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion grooves 712 of the intermediate case body 710). It is a groove-shaped opening for receiving, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 721 . That is, the insertion groove 722 is formed at a position overlapping with the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710 in a front view in the assembled state. The groove width of the insertion groove 722 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 .

The leading end guide groove 723 and the trailing end guide groove 724 are groove-shaped openings for allowing the leading end guide piece 762a and the trailing end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 to pass therethrough and restricting their moving directions. They are arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722 with a predetermined interval therebetween. The width of the leading end guide groove 723 is set to be smaller than that of the rear end guide groove 724, and the rear end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 is formed in the leading end guide groove 723 so that it cannot be inserted therethrough. . As a result, it is possible to suppress assembly failure when assembling the rack 762 to the rear case body 720, and furthermore, it is possible to improve the workability of the assembly work.

The front case body 730 is a member that slidably holds a pair of link members 770 between itself and the intermediate case body 710. The front case body 730 has a main body portion 731 formed in a horizontally long rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from the front, and the main body portion 731 of the main body portion 731. and a pillar-shaped pillar portion 732 that is disposed on the front surface and extends along the vertical direction.

The body portion 731 has a back surface 731a formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface 711a of the body portion 711 and the front surface 713a of the projecting portion 713 in the intermediate case body 710. As will be described later, the link member 770 is tilted. When rotated (displaced) between the upright state, the rear surface 731a of the main body portion 731, the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711, and the front surface 713a of the protruding portion 713 are positioned with respect to the front surface and the rear surface of the link member 770. abut. As a result, it is possible to rotate (displace) the link member 770 between the tilted state and the standing state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). can.

The column portion 732 is a portion for holding the guide rod 733 inside and sandwiching the link member 770 between the projecting portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710, and the front side (the left front side of the paper surface of FIG. 48) is opened. Box-shaped. The guide rod 733 is a member for guiding the elevation of the elevation base member 780. The guide rod 733 is made of a metal material and has a circular cross section. retained. By forming the pillar portion 732 into a box shape with an open front and storing the guide rod 733 inside the pillar portion 732, the guide rod 733 can be arranged using the dead space. , and the size of the annular motion unit 700 as a whole can be reduced.

As will be described later, the guide rod 733 is inserted through the guided portion 784 of the lift base body 780 , so that the moving direction of the lift base body 780 is moved in the vertical direction (the direction of the guide rod 733 ) through the guided portion 784 . axial direction). In this case, the guide rod 733 is arranged forward (front side) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and rearward (rear side) of the elevation base member 780 (main body portion 781). Thus, it is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the lifting base body 780 offset on the front side with respect to the rack 762 and ensuring the smooth lifting operation of the lifting base body 780 .

The drive motor 740 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, and its drive shaft protrudes to the back side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711). A first gear 751 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 740, and a second gear 752 to a sixth gear 756 are supported on the first gear 751 by a plurality of shafts 725 of the rear case body 720, respectively. are meshed with each other in turn, and the sixth gear 756 is meshed with a pinion gear 761 pivotally supported on the shaft 725 of the rear case body 720 .

The rack and pinion mechanism consists of the pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762, as described above. racks 762 are arranged to face each other with their tooth flanks facing each other.

The rack 762 has a front end guide piece 762a and a rear end guide shaft 762b projecting from one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction, respectively, and an insertion hole 762c is formed through the side of the rear end guide shaft 762b. . The front end guide piece 762a is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped projection, and the rear end guide shaft 762b is formed as a shaft having a circular cross section. As described above, the front end guide piece 762a and the rear end guide shaft 762b are inserted into the front end guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 of the rear case body 720, thereby causing the rack 762 to slide (linearly move). The direction is restricted to the extending direction of both guide grooves 723 and 724 .

The pair of link members 770 are members for constituting a link mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the rack and pinion mechanism to the elevation base member 780 and the ring forming member 790. One side (base end) is connected to the rack 762 , and the other longitudinal side (tip end) is connected to the elevation base body 780 and the ring forming member 790 . Here, the detailed configuration of link member 770 will be described with reference to FIG.

50(a) is a front perspective view of the link member 770, FIG. 50(b) is a rear perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50(c) is a portion Lc of FIG. 50(d) is a side view of the link member 770 as viewed in the direction of arrow Ld in FIG. 50(a). FIG.

The link member 770 includes a long plate-like main body portion 771, an insertion shaft 772 projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 771 on one longitudinal side (base end) of the main body portion 771, and the insertion shaft 772 A protruding wall portion 773 protruding from the front of the main body portion 771 on the opposite side (tip) of the main body portion 771 in the longitudinal direction, and a gear portion provided at the protruding tip end of the protruding wall portion 773. 774.

The insertion shaft 772 is a shaft having a circular cross section that is inserted through the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion shaft 712 of the intermediate case body 710, as described above. The protruding wall portion 773 is a portion for offsetting the arrangement position of the gear portion 774 toward the front (forward) side of the main body portion 771, and protrudes from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at a protruding height h. The gear portion 774 has a shaft support hole 774a penetrating through the center and a plurality of teeth 774b carved on the outer periphery around the shaft support hole 774. 782 is inserted (pivotally supported) and meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring forming member 790 via the teeth 774b.

In this embodiment, the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b ) is formed as a spur gear whose tooth trace direction is parallel to the axial direction. Engraved with extension. Therefore, even if the gear portion 774 is relatively displaced with respect to the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 to be meshed with due to the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (body portion 771) (Fig. 48 and Fig. 48). 49), a tooth 774b carved extending from the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 773 can be meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring forming member 790, and these It is possible to suppress disengagement between the gear portion 774 and the gear portion 792 . Further, even if relative displacement occurs due to bending or twisting as described above, and the gear portions 774 and 792 are relatively displaced in the axial direction , the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 is engraved to extend. Since the meshing area between the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) and the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) can be secured for the teeth 774b, the uneven wear of these teeth 774b and 772b is suppressed, and the durability is improved. can be improved.

Here, for example, if the main body portion 771 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outside in the radial direction) of the gear portion 774 , it is easy to secure the area of the bearing surface on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 . However, in this embodiment, since the projecting wall portion 773 is connected to the rear surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the projecting wall portion 773 can be secured to the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. seat surface area is reduced.

In this case, the protruding wall portion 773 has a wall surface opposite to the wall surface on which the tooth 774b of the gear portion 774 extends and is carved (wall surface on the shaft center side of the shaft support hole 774a). Since the protruding wall portion 773 is formed as an arc-shaped concave curved surface centering on the axis, even if the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end face) of the gear portion 774, the shaft of the gear portion 774 is A bearing surface area can be secured on the directional end surface, and the diameter of the collar C (see FIG. 49) disposed on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 can be increased accordingly. Furthermore, when the link member 770 (the body portion 771, the projecting wall portion 773, and the gear portion 774) is integrally molded from a resin material, the projecting wall portion 773 may be provided on the side opposite to the wall surface where the teeth 774b are formed. By forming the wall surface as a concave curved surface, not only the protruding wall portion 773 but also the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 can have a uniform thickness as a whole, and the moldability can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the protruding wall portion 773 is provided with teeth 774b over its entire surface (that is, up to the connecting portion with the front surface of the main body portion 771), so that the area where the teeth 774b are formed is sufficiently large. 48 and 49). Further, as described above, when the link member 770 (the main body portion 771, the projecting wall portion 773, and the gear portion 774) is integrally molded from a resin material, the tooth 774b extends only halfway up the projecting wall portion 773. The thickness of the projecting wall portion 773 can be made uniform over its entirety to further improve its moldability.

As described above, the link member 770 has a protruding wall portion 773 protruding from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at a protruding height h, and a gear portion 774 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding wall portion 773 . Therefore, the gear portion 774 can be separated from the main body portion 771 by the projection height h of the projection wall portion 773 . That is, in the assembled state, the arrangement position of the lifting base member 780 can be offset forward from the rack 762 by the protrusion height h of the protrusion wall portion 773 (FIG. 55). and FIG. 57). The effect of such an offset will be described later.

Returning to FIGS. 48 and 49, description will be made. The elevating base body 780 is a member that is vertically elevated between the retracted position and the coupling position by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770. A pair of shafts 782 projecting from the link member 770 and supporting the gear portion 774 (shaft support hole 774a) of the link member 770, and a gear portion 792 (shaft support hole 774a) of the ring forming member 790 provided side by side below the pair of shafts 782. A pair of shafts 783 that pivotally support the holes 792 a ), and a pair of shafts 783 are arranged on the rear surface of the main body 781 below the pair of shafts 783 and are guided vertically by the pillars 732 (guide rods 733 ) of the front case body 730 . and a cover member 785 provided on the back surface of the body portion 781 .

The guided portion 784 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes through which the guide rods 733 can be inserted. is restricted only in the direction along

The cover body 785 is a member arranged to face the axial end surfaces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 (see FIG. 51), and has a generally trapezoidal head when viewed from the front. A portion 785a and an extension portion 785b extending downward from the lower edge of the head portion 785a and having a narrower width than the head portion 785a are integrally formed from a thin metal plate. . As will be described later, when relative displacement occurs in the gear portions 774 and 792, the cover body 785 (the head portion 785a and the extended portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 792. Therefore, the relative displacement can be suppressed, and the meshing state of the gear portions 774 and the meshing state of the gears 774 can be properly maintained.

The gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 have shafts 782 and 783 inserted through shaft support holes 774a and 792a of the gear portions 774 and 792, respectively. The shafts 782 and 783 are rotatably supported by the shafts 782 and 783 by fastening and fixing the fastening screws while interposing the collars C having a larger diameter than the shaft support holes 774a and 792a at the tips of the shafts 782 and 783. be.

The pair of ring-forming members 790 are members that are rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770 and form a ring shape at the coupling position. It mainly includes a body portion 791 formed in a shape divided into two, and a gear portion 792 arranged on one circumferential side (base end) of the body portion 791 . The gear portion 792 is pivotally supported by the elevation base body 780 and meshed with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. and a plurality of teeth 792b engraved on the outer periphery as

A magnet (not shown) is embedded in the other circumferential side (tip) of the body portion 791 opposite to the side on which the gear portion 792 is arranged, and forms an annular shape at the coupling position. When doing so (see FIG. 47), the tips of the ring forming members 790 can be brought into close contact with each other by utilizing the magnetic force of the magnet. As a result, the ring shape can be reliably formed by the pair of ring forming members 790 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a connection state between the link member 770, the elevation base body 780, and the ring forming member 790 will be described. 51 is a partially enlarged rear view of the annular motion unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 51 illustrates a state in which the lift base body 780 is arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 54 to be described later.

As shown in FIG. 51, on the elevation base body 780, the tips (gear portions 774) of the pair of link members 770 are respectively supported by a pair of shafts 782 (see FIG. 49), and a pair of shafts 783 (see FIG. 49). 49), and the base ends (gear portions 792) of the pair of ring forming members 790 are respectively pivotally supported, and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are meshed.

Therefore, as will be described later, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 rotate the gear portion 774 (shaft 782, see FIG. 49). It is rotated with respect to the elevation base body 780 as the center, and the rotation is transmitted to the ring forming member 790 through the meshing of the gear portions 774 and 792, so that the ring forming member 790 is rotated by the gear portion 792 (shaft 783, see FIG. 49) is rotated with respect to the gear portion elevating base body 780. As shown in FIG. At the same time, the pair of link members 770 are erected or tilted with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730, so that the elevation base body 780 is elevated with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730 (FIG. 52). to Figure 57).

Here, the lift base body 780 is connected to the tip of a link member 770 formed in a long plate shape, and the case bodies 710, 720, and 730 are lifted and lowered via the link member 770. Occasionally, due to bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771), the lifting base body 780 tends to vibrate or sway in the front-rear direction (vertical direction of the paper in FIG. 51). Also, the ring forming member 790 itself is formed in the shape of an elongated plate, and has a free end on the side opposite to the base end connected to the lifting base body 780. Therefore, during the lifting operation, Vibration and shaking of the lifting base body 780 are likely to occur. In particular, in this embodiment, since the magnet is embedded in the tip of the ring forming member 790, the weight of the tip is increased, and the ring forming member 790 is more likely to vibrate or sway.

Such vibration or shaking of the elevation base body 780 in the front-rear direction causes relative displacement between the link member 770 and the elevation base body 780 . That is, relative displacement is caused between the gear portion 774 integrally formed with the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 . Similarly, vibration or shaking of the ring forming member 790 with respect to the elevating base body 780 causes relative displacement between the gear portion 792 formed integrally with the ring forming member 790 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. . As a result, the meshing state of the gear portions 774 and 792 becomes unstable. , 792 is accelerated, resulting in a decrease in durability.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a cover body 785 is disposed on the rear surface of the elevation base body 780 , and the cover body 785 is attached to the axial end faces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 . are placed facing each other. As a result, the bending and torsion of the link member 770 (body portion 771) causes vibration and shaking in the elevation base member 780 and the ring forming member 790, and even if relative displacement between the gear portions 774 and 790 occurs. By bringing the cover body 785 (the head portion 785a and the extended portion 785b) into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 790, the relative displacement between the gear portions 774 and 792 is suppressed and the meshing thereof is suppressed. You can keep the condition right. As a result, it is possible to appropriately perform the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790 and the elevation operation of the elevation base body 780 by suppressing the transmission failure of the driving force, and suppress the wear of the gear portions 774 and 792. Durability can be improved.

Particularly, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is located between the gear portions 774 and between the gear portions 792 of the annulus forming member 790 . Therefore, of the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 792, the shafts 782 and 783 (see FIG. 49) are sandwiched between the body portion 771 of the link member 770 and the body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790. The head portion 785a and the extended portion 785b of the cover body 785 are brought into contact with the other axial end face, and the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be effectively restricted.

For example, when the link member 770 is in an upright state or in a state close to the upright state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 51), the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is sandwiched between the body portion 771 of the link member 770 and the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49). Since the head portion 785a of the cover member 785 is arranged on the opposite side, the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending and twisting of the body portion 771 of the link member 770 is effectively displaced by the head portion 785a of the cover member 785. can be regulated. Similarly, for example, when the link member 770 is in a tilted state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 52) or in a state close to a tilted state, the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is attached to the body portion 771 of the link member 770. ), the extension portion 785b of the cover member 785 is arranged so that the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending and twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 is controlled by the extension portion of the cover body 785. 785b can be effectively regulated.

On the other hand, regarding the ring forming member 790, regardless of its rotational position (that is, whether the link member 770 is in an upright state or a tilted state), the left and right of the gear portion 792 (left and right in FIG. 51) Since the main body portion 791 of the annular ring forming member 790 is arranged at , the extended portion of the cover member 785 is located on the opposite side of the main body portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 with respect to the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49). 785b is arranged, the displacement of the gear portion 792 caused by the bending or twisting of the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 can be effectively restricted by the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785. FIG.

In this embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are not only meshed with the gear portions 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 located below them, but also the gear portions 774 adjacent to the left and right are engaged with each other. are also meshed. Similarly, each gear portion 792 of the pair of ring-forming members 790 not only meshes with each gear portion 774 of the link member 770 positioned above, but also meshes with the left and right adjacent gear portions 792 . be done.

As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the rotational motion of the pair of ring forming members 790 . That is, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and further transmitted from the pair of link members 770 to the pair of ring forming members 790 (see FIG. 48 and Figure 49). In this case, the pair of racks 762 of the rack and pinion mechanism are independent of each other with respect to the pinion gear 761 . Therefore, when the pair of rack members 770 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are also independent of each other, the amount of phase shift of the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 (for example, the amount of backlash and the dimensional tolerance) of the pair of racks 762 Also, the amount of phase shift of the link member 770 with respect to the rack 762 (for example, the amount of backlash of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c) differs between the pair of link members 770, and the ring forming member with respect to the link member 770 The amount of phase shift of 790 (for example, the amount of backlash of shafts 782 and 783 with respect to shaft support holes 774a and 792a, or the amount of backlash of teeth 792b with respect to teeth 774b) differs between the pair of ring forming members 790. As a result, phase shift occurs in the rotational motion of the pair of ring forming members 790, and the synchronization accuracy is lowered.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are meshed with each other, and the gear portions 792 of the pair of ring forming members 790 are meshed with each other. Even if it occurs in the transmission path, such a phase shift does not appear in the rotational operation of the ring forming member 790 (that is, the phase shift can be absorbed in the most downstream of the driving force transmission path), and the As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy in the rotational movement of the ring forming member 790 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57, operation of the ring motion unit 700 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 46 to 51 will be referred to as needed.

FIG. 52 is a schematic back view of the annular motion unit 700 in which the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 700 in the LIII line. FIG. 54 is a schematic rear view of the circular motion unit 700 in which the pair of circular motion members 790 are arranged at a position between the retracted position and the coupled position. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit 700 along line LV-LV in FIG. FIG. 56 is a rear schematic view of the annular motion unit 700 schematically illustrating the annular motion unit 700 in which a pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 700 in the LVII line.

52 to 57, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the outer shell structure including the intermediate case body 510, the rear case body 520 and the front case body 530, the drive motor 740 and the gear group (No. Illustration of the drive structure consisting of the 1st gear 751 to the 6th gear 756) or the cover body 785 is omitted. However, in FIGS. 52, 54 and 56, the positions of the upper edges of the main body portion 711 and the overhanging portions 713 (front surfaces 711a and 713a) of the intermediate case body 710 and the main body portion 731 (back surface 731a) of the front case body 730 are shown. ) are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, when the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are deployed in a direction away from each other, and their tip sides (tip guide pieces 762a) side) is meshed with the pinion gear 761 . Therefore, the pair of link members 770 whose base end sides (insertion shafts 772) are pivotally supported by the rear end sides (insertion holes 762c) of the pair of racks 762 are tilted. An elevating base body 780 whose tip side (gear portion 774) is pivotally supported is arranged at the lowest position. Also, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are deployed (distributed to the left and right) in directions away from each other.

When the drive motor 540 is driven from this state (the state in which the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position), and the rotational driving force thereof is transmitted to the pinion gear 761 through the gear group (FIGS. 48 and 49, 52, the pinion gear 761 is rotated to the right (clockwise) in FIG. direction). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually erected by displacing their base end sides (insertion shafts 772) toward the center (that is, toward the direction of approaching each other).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of link members 770 are rotated relative to the elevation base body 780, and the rotation is transmitted through the gear portions 774 and 792 to the pair of ring forming members. By being transmitted to 790, the pair of ring forming members 790 are rotated relative to the elevation base body 780, and the tips of the pair of ring members 790 are brought close to each other. At the same time, the upright motion of the pair of link members 770 causes relative displacement of the lift base body 790 with respect to the rack and pinion mechanism (the pinion gear 761 and the rack 762), and the lift base 790 is lifted.

In this manner, in the annular motion unit 700, the elevation base body 780 is pivotally supported on the distal ends of the pair of link members 770 whose proximal ends are pivotally supported by the rack and pinion mechanism, thereby raising or tilting the pair of link members 770. While the elevating base body 780 can be moved up and down by Relative rotation of the link member 770 with respect to the elevation base body 780 enables the ring forming member 790 to rotate.

That is, means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the elevation base body 790 (means for elevating) and means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the ring forming member 790 (means for rotating) are provided separately. Since the link member 770 can also be used as the link member 770, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the rotational motion and the vertical linear motion of the ring forming member 790 can be performed in parallel, that is, the ring is not formed at a fixed position, but is vertically changed in position. Since the rings are formed in order, the production effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are meshed, and the link member 770 is transmitted to the ring forming member 790. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. Due to bending and twisting of the member 770 (main body portion 771), the lifting base body 780 (and the pair of ring forming members 790) vibrates and shakes in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 54, horizontal direction in FIG. 55). (the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction increases).

The link member 770 (main body portion 771) or the ring forming member 790 (main body portion 791) bends or twists or vibrates or sways in the front-rear direction. By affecting gear portions 774 and 792 and displacing gear portions 774 and 792 relative to each other, gear portions 774 and 792 may become disengaged. Even if it is possible to avoid disengagement of the gear portions 774 and 792, the engagement state (engagement area) becomes unstable, and the surface pressure concentrates on a part of the tooth surface, resulting in the tooth 774b. , 792b, resulting in reduced durability.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the link member 770 has teeth 774b extending from the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 773 connecting the body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 (see FIG. 50). ), even when the gear portions 774 and 792 are relatively displaced as described above, the meshing between the gear portions 774 and 792 can be easily maintained due to the extension of 774b. As a result, it is possible not only to suppress disengagement, but also to stabilize the meshing state, suppress uneven wear of the teeth 774b and 792b, and improve their durability.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at a position between the retracted position and the coupling position (specifically, the rack 762 is positioned relative to the pinion gear 761). When the standing angle of the pair of link members 770 reaches a predetermined angle, the tooth 774b of the gear portion 774 and the tooth engraved on the protruding wall portion 773 Teeth 774b (see FIG. 50) connected to 774b begin meshing with teeth 792b of gear portion 792 of annulus forming member 790 .

Therefore, in the range from the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 to the state shown in FIGS. The tooth 774b extending and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 can be effectively used in the range where the gears 774 and 792 are most likely to be disengaged from each other. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress disengagement of the gears 774 and 792 or improve the durability of the teeth 774b and 792b.

From the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the drive motor 740 drives the pinion gear 761 further to the right (clockwise) in FIG. ), the pair of link members 770 are erected substantially vertically. That is, the direction connecting the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the lifting base body 780 and the insertion shaft 782 of the link member 770 is substantially vertical. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and the tips of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are brought into contact with each other to form the ring shape. It is formed.

In this case, when the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position (that is, when the pair of link members 770 are raised to an upright state (posture along the vertical direction)), the pair of link members Between the facing surfaces of 770, a connection portion between the column portion 732 of the front case body 730 and the projecting portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 (in this embodiment, the head portion 713b of the projecting portion 713, see FIGS. 48 and 49). are interposed, and the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion (the head portion 713b of the projecting portion 713) are in contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770 (see FIG. 56). The posture of the ring forming member 790 and the elevation base body 780 supporting the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

That is, at the coupling position, the pair of link members 770 are in a state of standing upright, and the center of gravity is raised, so that the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) around the insertion shaft 772. As the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right, the rack 762 is also easily moved in the direction of its linear motion (left and right direction in FIG. 56). Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the postures of the link member 770 and the rack 762, and as a result, the postures of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790, which are arranged at the tip of the link member 770, also become unstable.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members 770, the connection portion (overhanging portion) between the front case body 730 (column portion 732) and the intermediate case body 710 (overhanging portion 713) is provided. 713 (head portion 713b) of 713 is interposed, the connecting portion (head portion 713b) allows the rotation of the pair of link members 770 in the left-right direction around the insertion shaft 772 and the direction of linear movement of the rack 762. movement can be regulated. As a result, the pair of link members 770 can be maintained in an upright state, and the postures of the elevation base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupled position.

In addition, since a pair of link members 770 are arranged to face each other substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIGS. 52, 54 and 56), they are tilted relatively downward (for example, from FIG. 52 to FIG. 52). 55), the movement of the pair of link members 770 to rotate left and right (right and left directions in FIGS. 52 and 54) around the insertion shaft 772 is controlled by the pair of link members arranged facing each other. The 770s can cancel each other out, making it possible to maintain that posture.

On the other hand, the link member 770 may be formed in a flat plate shape, and it is difficult to maintain its posture against displacement in the front-rear direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). In this case, in this embodiment, the base end side (insertion shaft 772 side) of the link member 770 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the intermediate case body 710 and the front case body 730 . That is, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state, the front case body 730 (main body portion 731) is positioned against the front and rear surfaces of the base end side of the link member 770. The rear surface 731a and the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the standing state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). can be done. As a result, the elevation base member 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be raised and lowered while their postures are stabilized.

In particular, in the present embodiment, a projecting portion 713 is formed to project upward from the center portion in the width direction of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) (see FIGS. 48 and 49). 56, as the central portion in the width direction is approached (that is, as the link member 770 is erected), the position of the upper edge of the front surface 713a is raised (that is, it contacts the rear surface of the link member 770). available area is increased).

In this way, instead of raising the position of the upper edge of the front face 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (body part 711) as a whole, the position of the upper edge is raised by partially raising only the central part. While suppressing deterioration of the appearance by the wall surface of the intermediate case body 710 (or reduction of the arrangement area of the third pattern display device 81), the closer the link member 770 is to the upright state, the more the overhanging portion 713 becomes. By increasing the contact area between the front surface 713a and the rear surface of the link member 770, the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member 770 (suppressing the swing in the front-rear direction) can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to stably rotate (displace) the link member 770 in the vicinity of the standing state while suppressing deterioration of the appearance. That is, the attitude of the lift base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stably held in the stopped state at the connecting position, and the attitude of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stably maintained in the vicinity of the connecting position. can be raised and lowered while stabilizing the

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the projecting portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 has its front surface 713a retracted to the retracted position (that is, tilted to the lowest position) and the pair of link members. It is set in a shape that can come into contact with the back surface of 770 (see FIG. 46). As a result, the lift base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are stably held in a stopped state at the connecting position, and the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are stably held in the vicinity of the connecting position. For the purpose of raising and lowering while stabilizing the posture of the lifting base 780 and At the same time, the effect of stably maintaining the posture of the pair of ring forming members 790 in the stopped state can also be obtained.

56 and 57, when the drive motor 740 is driven to rotate in the direction opposite to the above case, the pinion gear 761 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. As the racks 762 rotate, the pair of racks 762 are unfolded (that is, they are linearly moved in a direction to separate the insertion holes 762c on the rear end side from each other). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually tilted, and as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the pair of ring forming members 790 are retracted to the retracted position.

Here, in the annular operating member 700, the weight of the lifting base member 780 and the pair of annular forming members 790 acts on the rack and pinion mechanism (the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762) via the pair of link members 770. be done. That is, the weight of the lift base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts through the pair of link members 770 in the direction to deploy the pair of racks 762 . Therefore, there is a possibility that the lift base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 may be lowered from the coupling position. In this case, the driving force of the drive motor 740 opposes the weight of the lift base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790, thereby restricting the lift base body 780 from descending (that is, the lift base body 780 is coupled). The hold-in-position structure increases the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the projecting wall portion 773 is interposed between the body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the projecting height of the projecting wall portion 773 is The gear portion 774 is offset from the main body portion 711 to the front (front) side by the amount of h (see FIG. 50(d)). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the elevating base body 780 extends in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack 762 (that is, in the plane of FIGS. 54 and 56). 55 and 57), the thickness dimension of the link member 770 (that is, the total dimension of the thickness dimension of the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 and the projecting height h of the projecting wall portion 773). offset (spaced) from the rack 762 by

As a result, the weight of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts on the rack 762 via the link member 770 even in the above-described offset direction. That is, as the force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770, it is possible to generate a force component in the direction in which the lift base body 780 is offset, and the corresponding force component moves the rack 762 in the movement direction. can be made smaller. As a result, the energy consumption required for drive motor 740 can be suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, in the coupled position, the link member 770 is erected in a posture along the vertical direction, and the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the elevation base body 780 and the link member 770 are inserted. The direction connecting the shaft 772 is substantially orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack 762 . Therefore, when the weight of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 is applied to the rack 762 via the link member 770, the force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770 is the weight of the rack 762. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction of deploying the link member 770 (that is, the direction of tilting the link member 770 in the upright state). As a result, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the lifting base member 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be held at the coupling position. can be suppressed.

More specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevation base body 780 is 772 in the horizontal direction is smaller than the distance T2 (T1<T2). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are erected in a posture that is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (that is, the pair of link members 770 are in an inverted V shape). By setting the pair of link members 770 in the V-shaped posture in this manner, the drive motor 740 can be operated as described above in order to start the operation from the state (coupled position) shown in FIG. When rotating in the opposite direction, the deployment of the pair of racks 762 (that is, the tilting of the pair of link members 770) due to the rotation can be easily and reliably started.

In particular, in this embodiment, a magnet is embedded in the tip of the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790, and the tips of the main body portion 791 are magnetically attached to each other. , the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position. On the other hand, when starting the movement from the coupling position to the retracted position, it is necessary to release the magnetism of the magnet. In this case, keeping the pair of link members 770 in a V-shaped posture (that is, setting T1<T2) maintains the coupled state at the coupled position and starts the movement from the coupled position to the retracted position. It is particularly effective in that it is compatible with the release of the coupled state at the time and the assurance of both.

Here, the magnet embedded at the tip of the body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 may be omitted. In this case, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevation base body 780 and the distance T2 in the horizontal direction between the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 are approximately It is preferable that they are the same (T1=T2) or the former is larger than the latter (T2<T1). As a result, even when the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevation base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position.

In this embodiment, the guide rod 733 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and on the rear side (right side of FIG. 57) of the elevation base body 780 (main body portion 781). be done. Further, the guided portion 784 of the lift base body 780 through which the guide rod 733 is inserted is arranged at the lowest position of the lift base body 780 (main body portion 781). That is, in the forward offset direction of the lifting base body 780 with respect to the rack 762, the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762, the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members A guide rod 733 is arranged at a position between the center of gravity of the structure 790 , and the elevation of the lift base 780 is guided via the guide rod 733 and the guided portion 784 . With this arrangement, it is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the lifting base body 780 offset on the front side with respect to the rack 762 described above and ensuring the smooth lifting operation of the lifting base body 780 .

Next, the swing motion unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64. FIG.

The rocking motion unit 800 includes two arm members 820 as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 11), and consists of two units for moving (displacing) both arm members 820 . That is, the rocking motion unit 800 is composed of two units arranged above the rear case 210 and on the left and right sides of the opening 211a when the rear case 210 is viewed from the front. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacing) the arm member 820 is the same in the two units, one of these two units (the left side of the opening 211a) will be described below. The unit provided (see FIGS. 7 and 11) will be referred to as a swing motion unit 800 and will be described.

58 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 800 with the arm member 820 retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 59 is a swing motion unit with the arm member 820 extended to the extended position. 800 is a front perspective view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the swing motion unit 800 includes an arm member 820 whose proximal end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 830 that imparts rotational driving force to the arm member 820. The arm member 820 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 58 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position, the arm member 820 hangs vertically downward, and retracts to the back side of the combined action unit 400, thereby making it invisible to the player (see FIG. 6), while extending it. At the protruding position, the arm member 820 lifts its tip upward and assumes a posture inclined obliquely downward, and protrudes the tip in front of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 5).

In this case, in this embodiment, when the arm member 820 is arranged at the extended position shown in FIG. 59, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position as described later. Therefore, it is not necessary to oppose the driving force of the drive motor 830 so that the arm member 820 does not rotate toward the retracted position due to the action of gravity (its own weight). The energy consumption of the drive motor 830 required for holding can be suppressed. This detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. FIG.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking motion unit 800 in which the rocking motion unit 800 is viewed from the front. Also, FIG. 61(a) is a rear view of the swing motion unit 800 with the arm member 820 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 8 is a partially enlarged rear view of the operation unit 800. FIG. 61(a) and 61(b) show the swing motion unit 800 with the mounting base 810 removed.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the rocking motion unit 800 has a mounting base 810 arranged on the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), and its proximal end is rotatably supported by the mounting base 810. An arm member 820, a drive motor 830 that generates a driving force for rotating the arm member 820, and a front case body 840 in which the drive motor 830 is arranged and that is arranged in front of the mounting base 810. , is mainly provided.

The mounting base 810 is a member for accommodating the proximal end of the arm member 820 and the drive motor 830 between itself and the front case body 840, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The mounting base 810 has a shaft 811 projecting from the front thereof and for rotatably supporting the arm member 820 .

The arm member 820 includes a main body portion 821 formed in an elongated shape, a groove portion 822 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the base end side of the main body portion 821, and a main body portion 821 opposite to the groove portion 822. A decorative portion 823 formed as a decorative body and covering the front face of the tip side of the head, and a shaft support hole 824 formed through the main body portion 821 at a position between the decorative portion 823 and the groove portion 821. The Lord is prepared.

The groove portion 822 is composed of a linearly extending first groove 822a and a second groove 822b connected to one end of the first groove 822a and extending in an arcuate shape. It is formed as an L-shaped groove in front view from 822b. In other words, the groove portion 822 is a second groove 822b that is recessed in one of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a.

The arc shape of the second groove 822b is the state in which the protruding pin 833 is arranged at the end point of the first groove 822a (connection position between the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) (see FIG. 63(b)). , coincides with an arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 . The width of the first groove 822a and the width of the second groove 822b are set to be the same as each other. is rotatably journalled with respect to the mounting base 810 . In this case, the contact surface portion 841 of the front case body 840 is brought into contact with the arm member 820 on the front surface of the body portion 821 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 824 (FIG. 61(b)). reference). Thereby, the arm member 820 is held in a rotatable state at its proximal end between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840 .

The drive motor 830 has a plate-shaped drive arm 832 fixed at its base end to a drive shaft 831 and extending radially outward from the drive shaft 831 , and a projection protruding from the tip of the drive arm 832 . The protruding pin 833 is inserted into the groove 822 of the arm member 820 and fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the front case body 840 by a fastening screw.

As described above, the projecting pin 833 is a portion inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and has an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 822 (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) of the arm member 820. It is formed as a cylinder of diameter. Therefore, when the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, the protruding pin 833 moves in the groove 822 of the arm member 820 along the extending direction of the groove 822 , and as a result, the arm member 820 is rotated about axis 811 .

Next, referring to FIGS. 62 to 64, the swing motion of the swing motion unit 800 will be described. In this description, FIG. 61 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIGS. 62 to 64 are diagrams for explaining in chronological order the process of moving the arm member 820 of the swing motion unit 800 from the retracted position to the extended position. 64(a) is a rear view of the rocking motion unit 800, and FIGS. 62(b), 63(b) and 64(b) are the parts LXIIb and 63(a) of FIG. 62(a), respectively. ) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking motion unit 800 at the portion LXIIIb of FIG. 64(a) and the portion LXIVb of FIG.

62 shows a state in which the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven and the arm member 820 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position by a predetermined amount, and FIG. 63 shows the state in which the arm member 820 is in the extended position. FIG. 64 illustrates the state immediately after reaching the arm member 820 and the state in which the drive motor is further rotated.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), when the arm member 820 is placed at the retracted position, the arm member 820 is suspended downward, and the protruding pin 833 is It is positioned at the starting point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822 (the end opposite to the side connected to the second groove 822b, the right side in FIG. 61(b)).

At this retracted position, the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion 821a projecting from the side surface of the body portion 821 of the arm member 820 faces the regulation surface 812 on the side wall of the mounting base 810 with a predetermined gap. Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft 811 by receiving an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine), the projection 821a hits the regulation surface 812. By contacting them, the rotation of the arm member 820 can be restricted, and such rotation can be rapidly converged.

The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) (the state in which the arm member 820 is arranged at the retracted position), and the drive arm 832 moves toward the left side of FIG. 61(b). When rotated clockwise (counterclockwise), the projecting pin 833 is moved toward the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822 (the side connected to the second groove 822b, the left side in FIG. 61(b)). .

Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), the arm member 820 is rotated rightward (clockwise) in FIG. 61(b) about the pivot hole 824. The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is further rotated, and the drive arm 832 is further rotated to the left (counterclockwise) in FIG. 62(b). 63(a) and 63(b), the arm member 820 is placed in the extended position.

Here, also in the conventional game machine, a first shaft (corresponding to the shaft 811), a moving member (corresponding to the arm member 820) rotated around the first shaft, and a driving force applied to the moving member and a driving motor (corresponding to the driving motor 830) that rotates the moving member around the first axis by the driving force of the driving means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position (corresponding to the extended position), it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (lowering) due to the action of gravity. In this case, in the above-described conventional game machine, the driving force of the driving motor is made to oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member), thereby restricting the movement (lowering) of the moving member (that is, holding the moving member at the raised position). ) structure, energy consumption required to hold the moving member increased.

In contrast, according to the swing motion unit 400 of the present embodiment, by mechanically holding the arm member 820 at the extended position, the driving force of the drive motor 830 can be released and the arm member 820 is extended. It is possible to suppress energy consumption required for holding the position.

63(a) and 63(b) (the protruding pin 833 reaches the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822, and the arm member 820 is arranged at the extended position). (immediately after being driven), the driving motor 830 is further driven to rotate. As a result, the drive arm 832 is further rotated to the left (counterclockwise) in FIG. form a moved (accepted) state in the second groove 822b of the .

Thus, in the present embodiment, the second groove 822b is connected to the end point of the first groove 822a (one of the inner wall surfaces facing each other of the first groove 822a is provided with a concave portion). cage), and in a state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position, the protruding pin 833 is moved into the second groove 822b (on one inner wall surface of the mutually opposing inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a). Since the protruding pin 833 is received in the recessed recess, the arm member 820 is mechanically held in the extended position (the arm member 820 is centered around the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811)). to be rotated). That is, even if the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position, and the consumption of the drive motor 830 required for holding the arm member 820 at the extended position is reduced accordingly. Energy can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the projecting pin 833 and the shaft support hole 824 (the ) are substantially orthogonal to each other, and the mutually facing inner wall surfaces of the second groove 822b in the portion where the projecting pin 833 is positioned are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. is formed as

Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft support hole 824 (the shaft 811), the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b is directed in the direction matching the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. In order to press the projecting pin 833, even if the arm member 820 is rotated and the projecting pin 833 is pressed by the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b, the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 cannot be rotated. That is, arm member 820 cannot be rotated.

Therefore, when the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, for example, even if the arm member 820 is swayed by hitting or shaking the game machine, the arm member 820 can be pushed through the pivot hole. Rotation around 824 (axis 811) can be restricted, and as a result, it can be reliably held in the extended position.

In this case, as described above, the arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that, as shown in FIG. connected position), it conforms to an arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 . Therefore, when the protruding pin 833 arranged at the end point of the first groove 822b is moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b (that is, when the state shown in FIG. 63 is changed to the state shown in FIG. 64), ), since the movement trajectory of the protruding pin 833 and the shape of the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b match, it is possible to avoid fluctuations in the attitude of the arm member 820 arranged in the extended position. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 63, after the arm member 820 has been placed in the extended position, the posture of the arm member 820 in the extended position is suppressed (maintained in a stopped state). The protruding pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 in the extended position.

Here, the groove portion 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the side opposite to the shaft support hole 824 (the side away from the shaft support hole 824). Even if the inner wall surface on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 824 among the inner wall surfaces facing each other has a recessed portion, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the same manner as in the present embodiment. It is possible. However, in this case, after the arm member 820 is arranged at the extended position, it is necessary to switch the rotation direction of the drive motor 830 when moving (receiving) the protruding pin 833 into the second groove 822b. This complicates the control and lowers the reliability of the operation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove portion 822 has a shape (second 1 groove 822a is recessed in the inner wall surface on the shaft support hole 824 side of the inner wall surfaces facing each other). to the extended position and move (receive) the recessed pin 833 into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 in the extended position. As a result, the control can be simplified and the operational reliability can be improved.

Next, an annular motion unit 2700 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72. FIG. In the first embodiment, when the lift base body 780 is lifted and lowered, the front side (forward) offset amount of the lift base body 780 is maintained constant regardless of the lift position. The elevation base body 2780 in the embodiment changes (increases or decreases) the amount of offset to the front side (forward) according to the elevation position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 65 is a top view of the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720 and the front case body 2730 in the assembled state in the second embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of a case body 720 and a front case body 2730; FIG. 65, the length in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 65) of each case body 2710, 720, 2730 is partially omitted. Also, in FIGS. 65 and 66, only main parts of each of the case bodies 2710, 720, 2730 are illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the second embodiment, the space formed between the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710 and the rear surface 2731a of the front case body 2730 (path P for slidably guiding the link member 770). (central portion in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 65)) protrudes toward the front side (forward, upper side in FIG. 65) of both case bodies 2710 and 2730 .

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the space is formed linearly along the longitudinal direction of both case bodies 710 and 730, and the link member 770 is slidably displaced along the linear space. The amount of offset to the front side of the base body 780 is not changed and is maintained constant (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the space P is formed in a non-linear shape along the longitudinal direction of both case bodies 2710 and 2730, the link member 2770 is slidably displaced along the non-linear space. As a result, the link member 2770 is displaced toward the front side (the upper side in FIG. 65) and the rear side (the lower side in FIG. 65) (see FIG. 67). are also displaced toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) and the rear side (lower side in FIG. 65) during elevation. That is, the elevation base body 2780 is elevated while changing the amount of offset toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) (see FIGS. 70 and 72). A specific configuration will be described below.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the intermediate case body 2710 has a shape in which the front face 2711a of the main body part 2711 protrudes toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) at the central portion in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 65). Corresponding to the shape of the front face 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710, the front case body 2730 is formed such that the back face 2731a of the body portion 2731 is recessed toward the front side (the upper side in FIG. 65). Thus, a passage P is formed between the front surface 2711a and the rear surface 2731a to guide the link member 770 in a slidable manner.

The passage P is a first passage P1 located on both longitudinal sides of the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730 and extending linearly along the moving direction of the rack 762 (see FIGS. 48 and 49). The first passage P1 extends linearly in parallel with the first passage P1 and is offset to the front side (forward, upper side in FIG. 65) from the first passage P1. It consists of three passages P3 and a second passage P2 connecting between the third passage P3 and the first passage P1.

The interval between the passages P1 to P3 facing each other is set to be slightly larger than the plate thickness of the link member 2770 (body portion 771, see FIG. 67(a)), and the connecting portions of the passages P1 to P3 are arcuate. Formed smoothly by shape. Therefore, when the link member 2770 is slid between the tilted state and the upright state, the inner wall surfaces (the front surfaces 2711a) of the passages P1 to P3 face the front and rear surfaces of the link member 2770 (body portion 771). and back surface 2731a), effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 65), and smoothly displacing the link member 2770 between the tilted state and the standing state. can be done. Here, with reference to FIG. 67, the detailed configuration of link member 2770 will be described.

FIG. 67(a) is a side view of the link member 2770 and corresponds to FIG. 50(d). 67(b) is a top view of the assembled state of the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720 and the front case body 2730, and schematically shows a state in which the link member 2770 that is erected and laid down is arranged in the passage P. are graphically illustrated. Note that FIG. 67(b) shows a state in which the body portion 771 of the link member 2770 is cut along the opening edge of the passage P and viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the link member 2770 in the second embodiment is similar to the link member 770 in the first embodiment. is projected, and a projecting wall portion 2773 projects from the front on the other longitudinal direction side (tip) of the main body portion 771 opposite to the insertion shaft 2772, and the projecting wall portion 2773 projects A gear part 774 is arranged at the tip.

In the link member 2770 of the second embodiment, the projecting dimensions of the insertion shaft 2772 and the projecting wall portion 2773 are the same as those of the link member 770 of the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same except that the dimension is set larger (longer) than the projecting dimension of the portion 773 .

As described above, the insertion shaft 2772 is inserted through the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 2710 and into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 so as to be slidable in the rotational and axial directions. The axial end face is arranged on the rear face of the rear case body 720 via the insertion groove 722, and the collar C is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the insertion shaft 2772 (see FIGS. 48 and 49). .

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 2772 from the main body portion 771 (horizontal dimension in FIG. 67(a)) is such that the link member 2770 is guided (held) in the first passage P1. Now, in a state in which the tip of the insertion shaft 2772 protrudes from the back surface of the rear case body 720 and the link member 2770 is guided (held) in the third passage P3, the tip surface of the insertion shaft 2772 in the axial direction faces the rear case. It is set so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the body 720 (the collar C is placed in contact with the rear surface of the rear case body 720 or with a slight gap therebetween). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 slides in the insertion hole 762c (see FIGS. 48 and 49) of the rack 762 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67(b)). The link member 2772 can be slidably displaced along each of the first path P1, the second path P2 and the third path P3.

Returning to FIGS. 65 and 66, description will be made. In the intermediate case body 2710, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, an overhanging portion 2713 is formed at the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2711 so as to project upward. It is formed in a substantially triangular shape that widens toward the end (increases in width) when viewed from the front, and its front surface 2713a is formed flush with the front surface 2711a of the main body portion 2711 .

In this embodiment, the range in which the projecting portion 2713 is formed (the range in which the projecting base is connected to the main body portion 2711) is substantially the same as the region corresponding to the third passage P3. A front surface 2713a of 2713 is formed as a flat surface flush with the front surface 2711a of the body portion 2711 .

Therefore, in the vicinity of the upright state when the link member 2770 is rotated (displaced) toward the upright state, the front surface 2713a of the projecting portion 2713 contacts the back surface of the link member 2770, and the link member 2770 is in the upright state, the link member 2770 is sandwiched between the front surface 2713a of the projecting portion 2713 and the column portion 2732 of the case body 2730, so that the posture of the link member 2770 tends to become particularly unstable in the upright state. and in the vicinity thereof, the displacement of the link member 2770 is restricted, and the swinging of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

Also, the edge of the projecting portion 2713 is curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front (see FIG. 48). Therefore, as the link member 2770 is erected (that is, as its posture becomes more likely to become unstable), the area of the front surface 2713a of the overhanging portion 2713 that can contact the rear surface of the link member 2770 can be increased. While the swinging of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed, the area of the projecting portion 2713 that is visible from the front can be made smaller, thereby suppressing deterioration of the appearance.

A top portion of a column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 is connected to a head portion 2713b of the projecting portion 2713 of the intermediate case body 2710 . A guide rod 2733 is accommodated in the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 . The guide rod 2733 is a member for guiding the elevation of the elevation base member 2780, and is formed of a metal material as a rod-shaped member having a circular cross section.

Here, the guide rod 2733 in the second embodiment is the first portion M1 that is disposed on the bottom side (lower side in FIG. 66) of the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 with the axis aligned in the vertical direction. The first portion M1 is disposed on the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 66) of the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 with the axis along the vertical direction, and with the axis along the vertical direction. The third portion M3 is offset forward (front side, left side in FIG. 66) and the axial center is inclined with respect to the vertical direction to connect the first portion M1 and the third portion M3. and a second portion M2 arranged in an attitude.

Each portion M1-M3 of the guide rod 2733 is guided by the first portion M1 while the link member 2770 is guided in the first passage P1, and by the second portion while the link member 2770 is guided in the second passage P2. While the link member 2770 is guided to the third path P3 by M2, the lift base body 2780 is formed at a position where it can be guided (held) by the third portion M3. Here, the lift base body 2780 will be described with reference to FIG. 68 .

68 is a rear perspective view of the lift base body 2780. FIG. As shown in FIG. 68, a lifting base member 2780 according to the second embodiment has a guided portion 2784 provided on the rear surface of a main body portion 781 in the same manner as the lifting base member 780 according to the first embodiment. The lifting base body 2780 of the second embodiment has the same structure as the lifting base body 780 of the first embodiment except that the structure of the guided portion 2784 is different.

The guided portion 2784 is formed of an annular guide portion 2784a and a counter guide portion 2784b disposed below the annular guide portion 2784a (lower side in FIG. 68) while being spaced from the annular guide portion 2784a by a predetermined distance. The annular guide portion 2784a is formed with an inner wall surface continuous over the entire circumference, and a space surrounded by the inner wall surface serves as an insertion hole for inserting the guide rod 2733. As shown in FIG. That is, the insertion hole is formed as a closed hole. On the other hand, the opposing guide portion 2784b is formed of a pair of wall portions that are arranged to face each other with a gap therebetween. That is, the insertion hole is formed as an open hole that has an open portion in a part of the circumferential direction and allows communication between the inside and the outside through the open portion.

Thus, while four insertion holes are formed in the first embodiment, two insertion holes are formed in the second embodiment. Therefore, when the guide rod 2733 is formed in a shape having a bent portion (the connection portion between the first portion M1 and the second portion M2 and the connection portion between the second portion M2 and the third portion M3, see FIG. 66) However, it is possible to prevent the insertion hole from being locked by the bent portion of the guide rod 2733, and the elevation base body 2780 can be smoothly moved up and down along the guide rod 2733.

In particular, in this embodiment, one of the two insertion holes (opposing guide portion 2784b) is formed as a hole having an open portion in a part of the circumferential direction, and the open portion The insertion hole (opposing guide portion 2784b) facing the case body 2730 is arranged on the lower side of the two insertion holes. As a result, when the guide rod 2733 has a shape in which the upper end side (third portion M3) protrudes toward the front side (forward, left side in FIG. 66) (see FIG. 66), the lift base along the guide rod 2733 The lifting and lowering of the body 2780 can be performed smoothly.

Specifically, when the elevation base body 2780 is lowered from the coupling position (the position where the guided portion 2784 is guided by the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733), the guided portion 2784 (the annular guiding portion 2784a and the Of the opposing guide portions 2784b), the lower opposing guide portion 2784b reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733 first, and the opposing guide portion 2784b has an open portion on the front case body 2730 side. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the opposing guide portion 2784b from being locked by the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733 by using such an open portion. As a result, the lift base body 2780 can be lowered smoothly.

Similarly, when lifting the elevation base body 2780 from the retracted position (the position where the guided portion 2784 is guided by the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733), the guided portion 2784 (the annular guiding portion 2784a and the opposing guiding portion 2784) is lifted. The upper annular guide portion 2784a of the portion 2784b) first reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733, and the annular guide portion 2784a is guided along the inclination direction of the second portion M2. When the lift base body 2780 is displaced to the front side (forward, left side in FIG. 66) in , the opposing guide part 2784b is formed to have an open part on the front case body 2730 side, so the open part is used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opposing guide portion 2784b from being locked by the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733. As a result, the lift base body 2780 can be smoothly lifted.

As in the case of the first embodiment, the guide rod 2733 is positioned forward of the tooth surface of the rack 762 (front side, left side in FIG. 66) and rearward ( 66), the lifting base body 2780 is offset from the front side of the rack 762, and the lifting base body 2780 can smoothly move up and down, as will be described later. It is possible to achieve coexistence with ensuring

Next, referring to Figures 69 to 72, the operation of the ring motion unit 2700 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 65 to 68 will be referred to as needed.

FIG. 69 is a schematic back view of the annular motion unit 2700 in which the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 2700 in line LXX. FIG. 71 is a rear schematic view of the annular motion unit 2700, schematically illustrating the annular motion unit 2700 in which a pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the circular motion unit 2700 in line LXXI.

In addition, in FIGS. 69 to 72, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, an outer shell structure consisting of an intermediate case body 2710, a rear case body 720 and a front case body 2730, a drive motor 740 and a group of gears (first Illustration of the drive structure consisting of the 1st gear 751 to the 6th gear 756), the cover body 785, etc. is omitted. However, in FIGS. 69 and 71, the positions of the upper edges of the main body portion 2711 and the overhanging portions 2713 (front surfaces 2711a and 2713a) of the intermediate case body 2710 and the upper edge of the main body portion 2731 (back surface 2731a) of the front case body 2730 are shown. The position of the edge is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, when the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are deployed in a direction away from each other, and the tip side thereof (tip guide piece 762a) side) is meshed with the pinion gear 761 . Therefore, as in the case of the first embodiment, the pinion gear 761 is rotated rightward (clockwise) in FIG. As the pair of link members 2770 are gradually erected, the lift base body 2780 is lifted.

In this case, the pair of link members 2770 are slidably displaced while being guided by the first passage P1 of the passages P formed between the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730 (see FIG. 65). Base body 2780 (guided portion 2784 ) is lifted along first portion M<b>1 of guide rod 2733 .

When the rack 762 is linearly moved by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 540, and the pair of link members 2770 are erected and the elevating base body 2780 is further raised, the pair of link members 2770 is moved to the second path of the path P. At P2 (see FIG. 65), the guided portion 2784 of the elevation base body 2780 reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733, respectively, and is guided along the second path P2 and the second portion M2. , the pair of link members 2770 and the elevating base body 2780 gradually change their longitudinal position (horizontal position in FIG. 70) toward the front side (forward, left side in FIG. increasing), erected and elevated.

When the pair of link members 2770 reach the third passage P3 of the passage P (see FIG. 65) and the guided portion 2784 of the lift base body 2780 reaches the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733, these links The member 2770 and the elevation base body 2780 are set to the forwardmost position (horizontal position in FIG. 70) in the front-rear direction (that is, the amount of offset to the front side is maximized).

Thereafter, the pair of link members 2770 are further erected while being guided by the third passage P3 of the passages P (see FIG. 65), and the elevation base member 2780 (the guided portion 2784) is moved to the third portion of the guide rod 2733. By further rising along M3, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the pair of link members 2770 are erected substantially vertically, the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and the pair of An annular shape is formed by abutting the tips of the annular ring forming members 790 .

As described above, in the second embodiment, the pair of link members 2770 and the elevation base body 2780 are configured such that the amount of offset to the front side (forward, left side in FIGS. 70 and 72) can be changed (increased or decreased). As for the amount of offset to the side, the amount of offset at the coupled position is at least greater than the amount of offset at the retracted position. and the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required for lifting and lowering the elevation base body 2780 (annulus forming member 790) between the coupling position and the retracted position.

That is, if the elevation base body 2780 (annular ring forming member 790) is offset to the front side (front, left side in FIG. 72), the force component in the offset direction is generated. The weight of member 790) can reduce the force component tending to move rack 762 in its direction of movement. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required for holding the elevation base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) at the coupling position can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the lift base body 2780 (annulus forming member 790) is moved up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position, the above-described force component in the offset direction acts as a resistance, and the lift base body 2780 is moved accordingly. The energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to move up and down (annulus forming member 790) increases.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the third passage P3 of the passage P is arranged at a position that protrudes further toward the front side than the first passage P1, the elevation base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) while suppressing the amount of offset to the front side to a small amount in the path (area corresponding to the first passage P1 and the second passage P2) between the retracted position and the coupling position, and the coupling position (the third passage P3 ) can be increased to a large amount. Therefore, at the coupling position, a force component in the offset direction is ensured, and movement of the rack 762 by the weight of the lift base body 2780 (annulus forming member 790) can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the elevating base body 2780 (annulus forming member 790) is moved up and down between the retracted position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the resistance.

As a result, the energy consumption of the driving motor 740 required for holding the elevation base body 2780 (annulus forming member 790) at the coupled position is suppressed, and the elevation base body 2780 (annular ring forming member 790) is moved to the coupled position and retracted. It is possible to achieve compatibility with suppression of energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required for moving up and down between positions.

Next, an annular motion unit 3700 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. In the first embodiment, when the lift base body 780 is lifted and lowered, the front side (forward) offset amount of the lift base body 780 is maintained constant regardless of the lift position. In this embodiment, the amount of offset to the front side (forward) of the elevation base body 2780 is changed (increased or decreased) according to the elevation position as in the case of the second embodiment. Body portion 771 of member 3770 is elastically deformed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, the ring motion unit 3700 of the third embodiment differs from the ring motion unit 2700 of the second embodiment in the configuration of the link member 3700 from the link member 2700 (see FIG. 67) of the second embodiment. Except for one point, other configurations are the same. That is, in the third embodiment, the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720 and the front case body 2730 (see FIGS. 65 and 66) and the elevating base body 2780 (see FIG. 68) described in the second embodiment are provided. is used. Descriptions of these same configurations are omitted.

FIG. 73(a) is a side view of the link member 3770 in the third embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 50(d). 73(b) is a top view of the assembled state of the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720 and the front case body 2730, and schematically shows the state in which the link member 3770 that is erected and laid down is arranged in the passage P. are graphically illustrated. Note that FIG. 73(b) shows a state in which the body portion 771 of the link member 3770 is cut along the opening edge of the passage P and viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), a link member 3770 according to the third embodiment is similar to the link member 770 according to the first embodiment. is projected, and a projecting wall portion 2773 projects from the front on the other longitudinal direction side (tip) of the main body portion 771 opposite to the insertion shaft 772, and the projecting wall portion 2773 projects A gear part 774 is arranged at the tip.

Note that in the link member 3770 of the third embodiment, the projecting dimension of the projecting wall portion 3773 is larger than the projecting dimension of the projecting wall portion 773 of the first embodiment, compared to the link member 770 of the first embodiment. Other configurations are identical except that they are set to the larger (longer) dimension. On the other hand, in the link member 3770 of the third embodiment, the projection dimension of the insertion shaft 772 is smaller (shorter) than the projection dimension of the insertion shaft 2772 of the second embodiment, compared to the link member 2770 of the second embodiment. Other configurations are the same except that the dimensions are set. That is, the insertion shaft 772 is common in the first and third embodiments, and the projecting wall portion 3773 is common in the second and third embodiments.

As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is inserted through the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 2710 into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in the rotational direction and through the insertion groove 722 of the rear case body 720. A collar C is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the insertion shaft 772 (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

In this case, in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 is slidable in the axial direction with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 (see FIG. 67(b)). As in the case of the embodiment, when the collar C abuts against the rear surface of the rear case 520, the axial sliding of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 is restricted (restricted). .

That is, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 772 from the main body portion 771 (horizontal dimension in FIG. 73(a)) is such that the link member 3770 is guided (held) in the first passage P1. In this state, the tip surface of the insertion shaft 772 in the axial direction is substantially flush with the rear surface of the rear case body 720 (that is, the state in which the collar C is in contact with the rear surface of the rear case body 720 or has a slight gap). ) is set to

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 slides through the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. While the link member 3770 in the third embodiment can be slidably displaced along the second path P2 and the third path P3 (see FIG. 67(b)), the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 3770 in the third embodiment The body portion 771 of the link member 3770 does not slide axially (the vertical direction in FIG. 73(b)) with respect to the insertion hole 762c. It contacts the inner wall surface of the passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710). As a result, the body portion 771 of the link member 3770 is pressed by the inner wall surfaces of the second and third passages P2 and P3, and is elastically deformed forward (toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 73(b)). It is slidably displaced through the passage P2 and the third passage P3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the operation of annular motion unit 3700 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 69 to 71 will be referred to as needed.

FIG. 74 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an annular motion unit 3700 in which a pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and corresponds to FIG. In FIG. 74, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the outer shell structure including the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720 and the front case body 2730, the drive motor 740 and the gear group (first gear 751 The drive structure consisting of (756) to the sixth gear 756), or the illustration of the cover body 785, etc. is omitted.

As described above, when the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIGS. 69 and 70), the pair of racks 762 are deployed in a direction away from each other, and the drive motor 540 rotates. As the rack 762 is linearly moved by the driving force, the pair of link members 3770 are gradually erected, and the elevation base body 2780 is raised.

In this case, the pair of link members 3770 are slidably displaced while being guided by the first passage P1 of the passages P formed between the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730, as in the case of the second embodiment. At the same time, the lift base body 2780 (guided portion 2784) is lifted along the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733.

As shown in FIG. 74, the pair of link members 3770 are further raised and the elevating base body 2780 is raised, and the pair of link members 3770 are moved along the second path P2 and the third path P3 of the path P ( 73(b)), when the guided portion 2784 of the elevation base body 2780 is guided by the second portion M2 and the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733, the link member 3770 is erected substantially vertically. , a pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position to form a ring shape.

In this case, the body portion 771 of the link member 3770 is brought into contact with the inner wall surfaces of the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710) as described above, and the main body is When the portion 771 is pressed toward the front side (back surface 2731a side) of the front case 2730, the link member 3770 (body portion 771) is elastically deformed (deflection deformation).

As described above, in the third embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the positions of the first passage P1 and the third passage P3 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 73(b)) are different, The amount of offset at the coupling position is increased to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the elevation base body 2780 (annulus forming member 790) at the coupling position, and the amount of offset is reduced at the retracted position. Thus, it is possible to reduce the energy consumption of drive motor 740 that is required to move lift base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position.

In particular, in the third embodiment, the insertion shaft 772 projecting from one longitudinal side (base end) of the link member 3770 (main body portion 771) slides in the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in the axial direction. That is, one side (base end) in the longitudinal direction of the link member 3770 (body portion 771) is displaced in the offset direction (front-rear direction, vertical direction in FIG. 73(b)) with respect to the rack 762. Since the link member 3770 is connected to the rack 762 in a disabled state, as shown in FIG. ), and the elastically deformed main body portion 771 of the link member 3770 is moved to the other of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the third passage P3 (the front case body 2730). A state of being pressed against the back surface 2731a) can be formed.

As a result, in the state where the lift base body 2780 is arranged at the coupling position, in addition to the force component in the offset direction due to the offset of the lift base body 2780, the link member 3770 (main body portion 771) is moved to the third path P3. The increase in resistance caused by pressing against one of the opposing inner wall surfaces can suppress horizontal movement of the rack 762 due to the weight of the lifting base member 2780, the ring forming member 790, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the elevation base body 2780 (annulus forming member 790) at the coupling position.

On the other hand, in the first passage P1 of the passages P, the body portion 771 of the link member 3770 may be damaged depending on the opposing inner wall surfaces of the first passage P1 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710 and the rear surface 2731a of the front case body 2730). is not formed, and the state in which the main body portion 771 of the link member 3770 presses the opposed inner wall surfaces of the first passage P1 is released. As a result, the resistance between the link member 3770 (main body portion 771) and the inner wall surface of the first passage P1 is suppressed, and the elevation base member 2780 (annular member 790) is raised and lowered between the connecting position and the retracted position. Energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required for driving can be suppressed.

Next, the first joint operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. FIG. In the first embodiment, the crank mechanism (the crank gear 524, the rotating shaft 525a and the connecting rod 525) and the first link member 541 (the rotating mechanism) are used as the mechanism for converting the rotary motion of the drive motor 522 into the linear motion of the slide mechanism portion 530. ) is used, in the fourth embodiment, a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544) is used as a mechanism for converting the rotary motion of the drive motor 522 into the linear motion of the slide mechanism portion 530. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first joint operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment. 75, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, the first coupling operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment includes a driving portion 4520 that is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 4510 and generates a driving force, and the driving force of the driving portion 4520. A rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544 ) that transmits to the slide mechanism section 530 and is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 4510 .

Here, the first coupling operation unit 4500 according to the fourth embodiment transmits the rotational driving force of the driving section 4520 (driving motor 522) to the slide mechanism section 530 with respect to the first coupling operation unit 500 according to the first embodiment. Only the configuration (that is, the first embodiment employs the first link member 541, whereas the fourth embodiment employs a rack and pinion mechanism) is different, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Therefore, only the configuration for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving section 4520 (driving motor 522) to the slide mechanism section 530 will be described below, and the description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

The substrate member 4510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape oblong when viewed from the front, and a connecting hole 4513 is formed on the side of the pair of guide grooves 511 (on the left side in FIG. 75). The connecting hole 4513 is for inserting the connecting shaft 4526 in the drive part 4520 from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 4510 and connecting the connecting shaft 4526 and the pinion gear 4543 in the rack and pinion mechanism on the back side of the substrate member 4510. is a circular opening when viewed from the front.

The drive unit 4520 includes a drive motor 522, a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a second gear 4524 meshed with the pinion gear 523 and rotatably supported by the case body 521. , and a connecting shaft 4526 projecting from the end face of the second gear 4524 . The connecting shaft 4526 is coaxially fixed to the second gear 4524 . Therefore, when the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 is transmitted to the second gear 4524 via the pinion gear 523 and the second gear 4524 is rotated, the connecting shaft 4526 is rotated in synchronization with the second gear 4525 .

As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism is a member for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism portion 530. The pinion gear 4543 and the rack gear with which the pinion gear 4543 is meshed are arranged linearly on the side surface. and a rack 4544 which is engraved. The rack 4544 is connected to the slide mechanism portion 530 by fastening and fixing the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. In this connected state, the rack 4544 extends in the direction in which the rack gear extends. It is assumed to be a posture along the direction.

When the drive unit 4520 (case body 521) is assembled to the front side of the board member 4510, the connecting shaft 4526 is inserted through the connecting hole 4513 of the board member 4510, and the tip of the connecting shaft 4526 is connected to the back side of the board member 4510. protruded to A flat surface is formed at the tip of the connecting shaft 4526 by chamfering, and by engaging with the flat surface, the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is coupled to the connecting shaft 4526 so as not to rotate relative to it. A retaining ring E formed as an E-ring is attached to the tip of the connecting shaft 4526 inserted (coupled) to the pinion gear 4543 to prevent it from coming off.

Next, referring to Figures 76 and 77, the operation of the first combined operation unit 4500 will be described.

76(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 4500 with the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 76(b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 45 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 4500 in a folded state; 77(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 4500 with the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 77(b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. FIG. 45 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 4500 in a folded state; 76 and 77, the raised member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are omitted for the sake of simplification and easier understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b), when the first coupling member 539 is at the retracted position, the rack 4544 of the rack and pinion mechanism is positioned on the upper end side of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510 (see FIG. 76(b)). 76(b) upper side). Therefore, the layer A base plate 531 (see FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged on the upper end side of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised (the retracted position is not arranged). ) state is formed.

In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 changes the posture of the second link member 542 to the posture shown in FIG. , the sliding hole 542c is rotated in the upward direction). Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 76(a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be in a stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is vertically moved. Even when vibration is generated, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 can be used to quickly converge the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction.

From the state shown in FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b), the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the first direction in the drive unit 4520, thereby through the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 76(b)). 75), when the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism rotates forward (clockwise in FIG. 76(b)), the rotation of the pinion gear 4543 causes the rack 4544 to descend. As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A-layer base plate 531) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and as described above, two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIG. 38). and FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the rack 4544 of the rack and pinion mechanism is lowered, and the layer A base plate 531 (insertion shaft 531c) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved to the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510. As shown in FIGS. 77(b), the first coupling member 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged).

On the other hand, from the state shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the second direction opposite to the first direction in the drive unit 4520, When the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 77(b)) through the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 75), the rotation of the pinion gear 4543 causes Rack 4544 is raised. As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is lifted along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (Figs. 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b), the first coupling member 539 is arranged (returned) to the retracted position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the driving force transmission path for transmitting the driving force of the driving portion 4520 (driving motor 522) to the slide mechanism portion 530 is configured by the rack and pinion mechanism including the pinion gear 4543 and the rack 4544. The rotational driving force (rotational motion) of the portion 4520 (driving motor 522 ) can be converted into linear motion and transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 . As a result, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 522 can be efficiently transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530, and the slide displacement (lifting) of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, two or more (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 531c out of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism section 530 can be connected to one rack 4544. It is possible to increase the number of parts (collar C) necessary for holding 531c that can be shared by the rack 4544 as well. That is, in the first embodiment, the number of collars C that can be shared by the first link member 541 is only one. See), in the fourth embodiment, such two collars C can be eliminated (three collars C can be used also for the rack 4544). As a result, the number of insertion shafts 531c is ensured, and the number of parts (collars C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c is reduced while enabling stable sliding movement (up and down) of the slide mechanism portion 530. , the cost can be reduced.

Two or more insertion shafts 531c out of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 that slides (lifts/lowers) are connected to the first link member 541 (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. In the first link member 541 configured to transmit the driving force of the drive portion 520 to the slide mechanism portion 530 by swinging (rotating), the connecting portion (slide hole 541c) connected to the insertion shaft 531c moves. This is impossible because the trajectory is arc-shaped, and it becomes possible only by adopting a rack and pinion mechanism as a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive unit 4520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 as in the present embodiment. (That is, by making the movement locus of the rack 4544 a straight line, the input direction of the driving force can correspond to the direction of slide displacement (up and down) of the slide mechanism 530). , the number of insertion shafts 531c is ensured, and the number of parts (collars C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c is reduced while enabling stable sliding movement (up and down) of the slide mechanism portion 530. , the cost can be reduced.

Next, the first joint operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which structures of different mechanisms (a rack and pinion mechanism and a link mechanism (second link member)) are connected to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). Structures of the same mechanism (rack and pinion mechanism) are connected to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) in the fifth embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 78 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment. 78, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted.

Here, the first coupling operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment transmits the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34) to the slide mechanism section 530 with respect to the first coupling operation unit 4500 according to the fourth embodiment. Only the configuration (that is, the second link member 542 is employed in the fourth embodiment, whereas the rack and pinion mechanism is employed in the fifth embodiment) is different, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, only the configuration for transmitting the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530 will be described below, and the description of the same configuration as in the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

Further, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, of the pair of rack and pinion mechanisms, the one that transmits the driving force of the driving portion 4520 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (the one on the left side in FIG. "Pinion mechanism" and the one that transmits the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism part 530 (the one on the right side in FIG. 78) are referred to as the "biasing side rack and pinion mechanism".

As shown in FIG. 78, the substrate member 5510 is a member formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and has a connecting groove 5514 and a support plate at a position opposite to the insertion hole 4513 with the pair of guide grooves 511 interposed therebetween. A shaft 5516 is provided. The connection groove 5514 allows a locking claw (not shown) projecting from the front side of the pinion gear 5543 to be inserted from the rear side to the front side of the base plate member 5510 , and the biasing spring 571 is applied to the inserted locking claw. (See FIG. 34) is an opening for engaging the end portion of the support shaft 5516 and is curved and extended in an arc shape centering on the support shaft 5516 . That is, the connecting groove 5514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows movement of the locking pawl when the pinion gear 5543 is rotated about the support shaft 5516 .

The support shaft 5516 is a shaft for axially supporting the pinion gear 5543 and the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34), and protrudes from the front side and rear side of the substrate member 5510 respectively. That is, a pinion gear 5543 is attached to a support shaft 5516 projecting from the rear side of the substrate member 5510, and a biasing spring 571 is attached to a support shaft (not shown) projecting from the front side of the substrate member 5510. Supported. The support shaft 5516 is arranged at a position that is symmetrical with the communication hole 4513 with an imaginary straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a line of symmetry.

The urging side rack and pinion mechanism is a member for transmitting the urging force of the urging spring 571 (see FIG. 34) to the slide mechanism portion 530, as described above. It consists of a rack 5544 in which a rack gear to be engaged is engraved linearly on the side surface. These urging side rack and pinion mechanisms (pinion gear 5543 and rack 5544) have substantially the same configuration as the drive side rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544).

That is, the pinion gear 5543 has the same structure as the pinion gear 4543 except that a locking pawl (not shown) is formed on the front side, and other configurations that determine the characteristics of the gear such as the number of teeth and the pitch circle. . Similarly, the rack 5544 is the same as the rack 4544 except that the upper end side of the rack 5544 is uneven in order to avoid interference with the substrate member 5510, and other configurations that determine the characteristics of the rack gear such as the number of teeth and the tooth profile. be done.

Therefore, the slide mechanism portion 530 is held bilaterally symmetrically by the rack and pinion mechanism on the drive side and the rack and pinion mechanism on the urging side (that is, the support reaction force acts bilaterally symmetrically, and the slide mechanism portion 530 moves left and right. tilting can be suppressed), the slide displacement (up and down) of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed. Further, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is lifted, the driving force of the driving portion 4520 can be assisted by using the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34). can be suppressed.

As described above, the biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, and is disposed in a state in which the pair of arms are elastically deformed in a direction toward each other (see FIG. 34). The elastic recovery force urges the rack 5544 upward (the upper side in FIG. 78) via the pinion gear 5543 . That is, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts in the direction of holding the rack and pinion mechanism on the biasing side in the posture shown in FIG.

The operation of the first combined operation unit 5500 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG.

79(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 5500 with the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 79(b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position. 5500 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 5500 in a closed state. FIG. 80(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 5500 with the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 80(b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. 5500 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 5500 in a closed state. FIG. 79 and 80, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are omitted for the sake of simplification and easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), when the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, both the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the urging-side rack and pinion mechanism have racks 4544 and 5544 are arranged on the upper end side of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510 (upper side in FIG. 79(b)).

In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is directed to hold the rack 5544 in the rack and pinion mechanism on the biasing side in the position shown in FIG. The pinion gear 5543 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 79(b). Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 79(a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be in a stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is vertically moved. Even when vibration is generated, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 can be used to quickly converge the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction.

From the state shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), the drive motor 522 is driven to rotate in the first direction in the drive unit 4520, thereby through the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 79(a) and 79(b)). 78), when the pinion gear 4543 in the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 79(b)), the rotation of the pinion gear 4543 causes the rack 4544 to descend. As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (the A-layer base plate 531 ) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510 .

On the other hand, from the state shown in FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b) (the state in which the first coupling member 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged)), in the drive section 4520, the drive motor 522 is set to the first position. By being rotationally driven in the second direction of rotation opposite to the direction of rotation, the pinion gear 4543 in the rack and pinion mechanism on the driving side rotates in the opposite direction via the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 78). When rotated (counterclockwise in FIG. 80(b)), the rotation of the pinion gear 4543 raises the rack 4544 . As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A-layer base plate 531 ) is lifted along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510 .

According to this embodiment, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is slid (raised or lowered), the rack 5544 in the rack and pinion mechanism on the urging side can be lowered while the pinion gear 55443 is driven to rotate. can. In this case, as described above, the connecting shaft 4526 and the support shaft 5526 are arranged at positions that are symmetrical with respect to the imaginary straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511. The rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 5543 and rack 5544) and the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 5544) on the driving side have substantially the same configuration.

That is, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, in a configuration in which the slide mechanism portion 530 is supported by structures of different mechanisms (a rack and pinion mechanism and a link mechanism (second link member)), the left and right support reaction forces are As a result, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 becomes unstable. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the support reaction forces received by the pair of racks 4544 and 5544 from the respective pinion gears 4543 and 5543 can be symmetrically equalized, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 can be held symmetrically. be able to. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, all (six in this embodiment) insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism section 530 can be connected to the racks 4544 and 5544, and the insertion shafts 531c can be connected to the racks 4544 and 5544. The racks 4544 and 5544 can also be used for all the parts (collar C) required for holding. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the collar C can be made unnecessary. As a result, the number of insertion shafts 531c is ensured, and a part (collar C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c is omitted while the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably slid (lifted and lowered). reduction can be achieved.

It should be noted that omitting all of the parts (collars C) for holding the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 that slides (lifts and lowers) in this way is similar to the case of each of the above-described embodiments. In a configuration employing a link mechanism (first link member 541 or second link member 542), this is not possible. This is possible for the first time by adopting a rack and pinion mechanism for both of the urging sides that transmit the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530. The number of shafts 531c is ensured to enable stable sliding movement (up and down) of the slide mechanism portion 530, and parts (collars C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c are not required, thereby reducing costs. can.

Next, the first joint operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the racks 4544 and 5544 in the rack and pinion mechanism on the driving side and the rack and pinion mechanism on the urging side are separately formed has been described. The rack in the side rack and pinion mechanism is also used as the rack in the biasing side rack and pinion mechanism. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 81 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first joint operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment. 81, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted.

In contrast to the first coupling operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, the first coupling operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment has a configuration of the rack 6544 (that is, in the fifth embodiment, the racks 4544 and 5544 are two parts). are formed separately, whereas in the sixth embodiment, the rack 6544 is formed as an integral part), and other configurations are the same. Therefore, only the configuration of the rack 6544 will be described below, and the description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 81, the rack 6544 is a unit that connects and integrates the rack 4544 in the rack and pinion mechanism on the driving side and the rack 5544 in the rack and pinion mechanism on the urging side in the fifth embodiment. Formed as a part. That is, the rack 6544 is formed as a plate-like body in which a rack gear with which the pinion gear 4543 is meshed is engraved on one side surface, and a rack gear with which the pinion gear 5543 is meshed is engraved linearly on the other side surface. be.

Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

82(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 6500 with the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 82(b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 6500 in a folded state; 83(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 6500 with the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 83(b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 6500 in a folded state; 82 and 83, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are omitted for the sake of simplification and easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, according to the first coupling operation unit 6500, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, the drive motor 522 of the drive section 4520 is rotationally driven in the first direction, The pinion gear 4543 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 82(b)), and the rack 6544 (slide mechanism portion 530) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510, while the drive motor 522 of the drive portion 4520 is By being rotationally driven in the second direction of rotation opposite to the first direction, the pinion gear 4543 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 530 ) is lifted along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510 .

According to this embodiment, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, the rack 6544 is held symmetrically by the pair of pinion gears 4543 and 5543, so that the rack 6544 receives support reaction force from the pair of pinion gears 4543 and 5543. can be made symmetrical and uniform, and as a result, the sliding displacement (lifting and lowering) of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed.

Here, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, a pair of racks 4544, 5544 are formed independently, one rack 4544 is driven by one pinion gear 4543, and the other pinion gear 5543 is driven by the displacement of the other rack 5544. is driven, relative displacement is likely to occur between the pair of racks 4544 and 5544, so that a deviation occurs between the rotation of one pinion gear 4543 and the rotation of the other pinion gear 5543, causing the sliding displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 ( up and down) becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the rack 6544 is formed as an integral part, the relative positions of the rack gears formed on both sides do not shift. can be easily synchronized with the rotation of the pinion gear 5543. As a result, the slide displacement (up and down) of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the two rows of the insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 are connected by the rack 6544, so that the rigidity of the slide mechanism portion 530 as a whole can be increased. At the same time, the posture of the two rows of insertion shafts 531c with respect to the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 5510 can be stabilized. As a result, the slide displacement (up and down) of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a compound action unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 extends linearly, but the connecting groove 7481c of the slide rack 7481 in the seventh embodiment is curved in an arc shape. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

84(a) to 84(c) are exploded perspective views of the compound action unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment, showing relative displacement states of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the slide rack member 7481 with respect to the back arm body 471. is shown with the operating members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 removed. 84(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 84(b), and FIG. 84(c) shows the opening/closing second gear with respect to FIG. The gear 452 is rotated clockwise (right), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the compound action unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment, the opening/closing second gear 7452 differs from the opening/closing second gear 452 in the first embodiment in the arrangement position of the connecting protrusion 452d. It is formed. More specifically, the main body portion 7452a is formed so that the portion where the connecting protrusion 452d is disposed protrudes radially outward (lower in FIG. 84(b)) than the main body portion 452a in the first embodiment. As a result, the distance from the axis of the opening/closing second gear 7452 to the axis of the connecting projection 452d is the distance between the axis of the opening/closing second gear 7452 and the axis of the connection projection 452d in the first embodiment. is set to a dimension greater than the distance of

In the slide rack member 7481, as the connecting protrusion 452d of the second opening/closing gear 7452 is positioned radially outward, the connecting groove 7481c is formed on the guide protrusion 481d side (FIG. 84(b)). bottom). Also, the connecting groove 7481c is curved and extended in an arc shape. Specifically, the connecting groove 7481c has an annular shape whose axis is located on the side opposite to the axis of the opening/closing second gear 7452 (lower side in FIG. 84(b)) and on the extension of the guide protrusion 481d. It is formed in a substantially C shape divided at a predetermined central angle (approximately 45 degrees in this embodiment). The groove width of the connecting groove 7481c is set so that the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening/closing second gear 452 can slide.

As shown in FIG. 84(b), according to the compound action unit 7400 of the seventh embodiment, when the opening/closing second gear 452 is not rotated against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the opening/closing second gear 452 is not rotated. The connecting protrusion 7452d of the gear 7452 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 84(b)) by the slide rack member 7481, and the connecting groove 7481c and the second shaft 7452 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 84(b)). 427 is the distance L3. Also, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 has a gap W1 between the connecting holes 482d. As described above, the distance L3 is the same as the distance L1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26(b)), because the connecting projection 452d is positioned radially outward from the case of the first embodiment. (L1<L3).

For example, when the opening/closing second gear 7452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. By sliding in the connecting groove 7481c of the slide rack member 7481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 7452d causes the slide rack member 7481 to move upward (upward in FIG. 84(a)) while resisting the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace the slide.

That is, as shown in FIG. 84(a), when the opening/closing second gear 7452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connecting groove 7481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 84(a)) are displaced. The distance between them is shortened to a distance L2 (L2<L3), and the slide rack member 7481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L3 and L2.

In this case, the difference between the distances L3 and L2 is the difference between the distances L1 and L2 in the first embodiment (Fig. 26(a) and Fig. 26 ( b) is made larger than ((L1-L2)<(L3-L2)). Therefore, as the slide rack member 7481 slides upward, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in a direction away from each other, and the distance between the connecting holes 482d is increased. The interval W3 can be made larger than the interval W2 in the first embodiment (W2<W3). 84(c), in which the second open/close gear 7452 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise)), a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting groove 7481c of the slide rack member 7481 is formed in an arc shape having an axis on the opposite side of the opening/closing second gear 7452 (that is, convex toward the opening/closing second gear 7452). ), the slide displacement amount (L3-L2) of the slide rack member 7481 accompanying the rotation of the opening/closing second gear 7452 can be increased without increasing the size of the compound action unit 7400. Accordingly, the maximum amount of movement of the first pinion leg member 482 (and the second pinion leg member 483) (that is, the interval between the communication holes 482d, W3) can be increased. As a result, the maximum opening amount of the operating members 491 and 492 can be increased (see FIG. 27), and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a compound action unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, there are two sets of one-to-one members for supporting the operating members 491 and 492 (two sets of a pair of first pinion leg members 482 and a pair of second pinion leg members 483). ), but the members for supporting the operating members 491 and 492 in the eighth embodiment are arranged in pairs. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

85(a) to 85(c) are exploded perspective views of the compound action unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment, showing relative displacement states of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the slide rack member 7481 with respect to the back arm body 471. is shown with the operating members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 removed. 85(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 85(b), and FIG. 85(c) shows the opening/closing second gear with respect to FIG. The gear 452 is rotated clockwise (right), respectively.

Here, the compound action unit 8400 of the eighth embodiment differs from the compound action unit 400 of the first embodiment in that the first pinion leg member 482 is omitted and the shape of the second pinion leg member 8483 is changed. , but the other configurations are the same. Only these different configurations will be described below, and descriptions of the same configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the second pinion leg member 8483 of the eighth embodiment, the main body portion 8483a extends from the connecting hole 483d to the shaft support hole 483b with respect to the main body portion 483a of the second pinion leg member 8483 of the first embodiment. , and a second connecting hole 8483e is formed through the tip of the extended portion (the other longitudinal end opposite to the pivot hole 483b). Raised fastening portions 491a and 492a of the operation members 491 and 492 are rotatably inserted into the connecting hole 483d and the second connecting hole 8483d and fastened and fixed by fastening screws (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Thereby, the operating members 491 and 492 are connected to the second pinion leg member 8483 .

Between the pair of second pinion leg members 8483, an urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state, and the urging spring 484 is elastically restored. A force is applied in a direction in which the pair of second pinion leg members 8483 approach each other. As a result, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening/closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491 and 492 into close contact with each other, thereby forming a gap. can be suppressed.

Here, when the operation members 491 and 492 are opened and closed (see FIG. 27), each of the operation members 491 and 492 is supported at a plurality of points (at least two points) in order to stabilize the posture during the operation. It is preferable that In this case, in the case of the first embodiment, by connecting the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to each of the operating members 491 and 492, it is possible to support at a plurality of locations (two locations). However, in such a configuration, the number of parts of the members (the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483) for supporting the operating members 491 and 492 increases.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, since the second pinion leg member 8483 is provided with the connecting hole 483d and the second connecting hole 8483e, each of the motion members 491 and 492 can be supported at a plurality of positions (two positions). As a result, the first pinion leg member 8482 (and the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 for supporting the shaft support hole 482b of the first pinion leg member 482, see FIGS. 21 and 22)) is omitted. can do.

As a result, the weight of the entire combined motion unit 8400 can be reduced, so that the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 (see FIG. 21) can be reduced, and the size of the drive motor 530 can be reduced accordingly. can.

In particular, the first pinion leg member 482 (and the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 for rotatably supporting the shaft support hole 482b of the first pinion leg member 482) is such that the operation members 491 and 492 are the second It is a member that is displaced about the second shaft 427 together with the motion members 491 and 492 when rotated about the shaft 427 (see FIG. 27). Therefore, the reduction in weight by omitting the first pinion leg member 482 and the shaft portion 471c reduces the influence of the inertial force when the motion members 491 and 492 in the stopped state start to rotate, and the drive motor 530 contributes particularly to the miniaturization of

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a compound action unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the operation members 491 and 492 are opened and closed using the rotational motion of the first and second pinion leg members 482 and 483 has been described. uses the linear motion of the cam leg member 9483 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

86(a) to 86(c) are exploded perspective views of the compound action unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment, showing relative displacement states of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the slide cam member 9481 with respect to the back arm body 9471. is shown with the operating members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 removed. 86(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 86(b), and FIG. 86(c) shows opening/closing with respect to FIG. This corresponds to a state in which the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (right).

As shown in FIG. 86, a compound action unit 7400 according to the ninth embodiment includes an open/close second gear 452 between opposing surfaces (front and back) of a back arm body 9471 and a front arm body 472 (not shown). A slide cam member 9481 driven (sliding displacement) and a cam leg member 9482 driven (sliding displacement) by the slide cam member 9481 are provided.

The slide cam member 9481 and the cam leg member 9482 constitute a cam mechanism, and the rotational motion of the opening/closing second gear 452 is linear motion (the direction in which the pair of cam leg members 9482 approach or separate from each other (Fig. 86 ( b) the movement members 941 and 942 are opened and closed by converting the sliding displacement in the lateral direction).

The slide cam member 9481 includes a main body portion 9481a, a cam portion 9481b formed to protrude from both left and right sides of the main body portion 9481a, and a connecting projection portion 452d formed at one longitudinal end of the main body portion 9481a to connect the opening/closing second gear 452. It has a connecting groove 481c to be inserted, and guide protrusions 9481d projecting from the front and rear surfaces of the main body 9481a so as to have a substantially rectangular cross section and linearly extending along the longitudinal direction of the main body 9481a.

The guide protrusion 9481d is formed by shortening the extension length of the guide protrusion 481d in the first embodiment, and is slidable in the guide grooves 471d and 472d of the back arm body 9471 and front arm body 472. Interpolated. Therefore, the direction of sliding displacement of the slide cam member 9481 is the extending direction of the guide grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472), as in the case of the first embodiment. , FIG. 86(b) in the vertical direction).

The cam portion 9481b has a cam surface CS formed on the outer surface facing the second opening/closing gear 452 side. The cam surface CS is a sliding surface for pushing the main body portion 9482a of the cam leg member 9482 outward (in the direction away from the main body portion 481a), and is separated from the second open/close gear 452 as it is separated from the main body portion 9481a. It is formed as an inclined surface and arranged (interposed) between a pair of cam leg members 9482 (body portion 9482a) facing each other.

The cam leg member 9482 includes a main body portion 9482a, a shaft support hole 9482b penetrating through the main body portion 9482a, a first connecting hole 9482d1 penetrating through one end and the other longitudinal end of the main body portion 9482a, and a second communicating hole. A pair of them are arranged facing each other on both sides of the slide cam member 9481 with the slide cam member 9481 interposed therebetween. The shaft support hole 9482b is formed as an oval (long hole) hole extending along a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the body portion 9482a (horizontal direction in FIG. 86(b)).

The shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 is inserted through the shaft support hole 9482b in the assembled state. Here, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 is an oval (long hole)-shaped shaft body when viewed in the axial direction, and the long diameter direction thereof is the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471. (that is, the displacement direction of the slide cam member 9481).

The shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 has a dimension in the minor axis direction (vertical dimension in FIG. 86(b)) which is substantially equal to (or slightly smaller than) the dimension in the minor axis direction of the shaft support hole 9482b. On the other hand, the dimension in the major diameter direction (left-right dimension in FIG. 86(b)) is set sufficiently smaller than the dimension in the major diameter direction of the pivot hole 9482b. As a result, the cam leg member 9482 is guided along the shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 by the inner wall surface of the shaft support hole 9482b, so that the cam leg member 9482 moves toward or away from the slide cam member 9481 (FIG. 86(b)). ) left and right).

Raised fastening portions 491a and 492a of the operation members 491 and 492 are rotatably inserted into the first communication hole 9483d1 and the second communication hole 9483d2 and fastened and fixed by fastening screws (see FIGS. 21 and 22). This connects the operating members 491 and 492 to the cam leg member 9483 .

Between the pair of cam leg members 9482, an urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) made up of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 484 is applied. , a pair of cam leg members 9482 are configured to act toward each other. As a result, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening/closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491 and 492 into close contact with each other, thereby forming a gap. can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 86(b), according to the compound action unit 9400 of the ninth embodiment, when the pair of cam leg members 9482 are not slid against the urging force of the urging spring 484, the opening and closing operation is performed. The connecting protrusion 452d of the second gear 452 is drawn downward (downward in FIG. 86(b)) by the slide cam member 9481, and the connecting groove 481c and the second gear 452 move in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 86(b)). A distance between the two axes 427 is defined as a distance L1. Also, the gap between the pair of cam leg members 9482 is the gap W1 between the first connecting holes 9482d1.

For example, when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 9471 from the state shown in FIG. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide cam member 9481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d causes the slide cam member 9481 to move upward (upward in FIG. 86(a)) while resisting the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace the slide.

That is, as shown in FIG. 86(a), when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 move in the direction of slide displacement (the vertical direction in FIG. 86(a)). The distance between them is shortened to a distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide cam member 9481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2.

As the slide cam member 9481 is slid upward, the cam portion 9481b (cam surface CS) of the slide cam member 9481 pushes and widens the gap between the pair of cam leg members 9482 (body portion 9482a). , pushes the pair of cam leg members 9482 outward (in the direction away from the body portion 9481a of the slide cam member 9481). That is, the pair of cam leg members 9882 are slid in the direction of separating from each other, and the distance between the first connecting holes 9482d1 is increased to the distance W2. The same applies to the case of FIG. 86(c) in which the opening/closing second gear 7452 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise)), so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the ninth embodiment, the cam leg member 9482 is provided with the first connecting hole 9482d1 and the second connecting hole 9482d2. Each can be supported at multiple locations (two locations), for example, as in the case of the first embodiment, two members (first pinion leg 482 and second pinion leg 483, see FIG. 26). ) need not be provided. As a result, as in the case of the eighth embodiment, the overall weight of the combined action unit 9400 can be reduced, so that the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 (see FIG. 21) can be reduced. The size of the drive motor 530 can be reduced.

In particular, according to the ninth embodiment, when the motion members 491 and 492 in the stopped state start to rotate, the influence of the inertial force is reduced, and the driving motor is reduced compared to the case of the eighth embodiment. 530 can be further miniaturized.

That is, as described above, the slide cam member 9481 and the pair of cam leg members 9482 are rotated around the second shaft 427 (see FIG. 27). 492 is a member that is displaced about the second shaft 427 together with 492. According to the ninth embodiment, by adopting a cam mechanism, a slide cam for the back arm body 9471 and front arm body 472 (not shown) can be displaced. The arrangement positions of the member 9481 and the pair of cam leg members 9482 are biased toward the second shaft 427 in the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 (vertical direction in FIG. 86(b)). be able to.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the weight of the tip end side (the side opposite to the second shaft 427) in the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 (vertical direction in FIG. 86(b)). can be brought closer to the second shaft 425 side, the effect of the inertial force can be reduced accordingly when the motion members 491 and 492 in the stopped state start to rotate. As a result, the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 can be reduced, and further miniaturization can be achieved.

Next, the first joint operation unit 500 and the second joint operation unit 600 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, so that the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 Although the case of being coupled has been described, the coupling of the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 in the tenth embodiment is based on the first and second engagements of the first and second coupling members 10539 and 10630. This is done by engaging the portions 10539f and 10630f. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, in the first embodiment described above, it is necessary to set the angle α of the upper and lower surfaces 539e, 630a in relation to the angle θ of each of the link members 621, 622. Since the first and second engaging members 10539, 10630 are coupled by utilizing the engagement between the first and second engaging portions 10539f, 10630f provided on the two engaging members 10539, 10630, the upper and lower surfaces 10539e , 10630a can be set to any angle. That is, since the front view shape (protruding shape) of the first coupling member 10539 and the front view shape (concave shape) of the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be arbitrarily set, compared with the case of the first embodiment, the protrusion The protrusion height in the shape and the recess depth in the concave shape can be larger.

Thus, according to the tenth embodiment, when the first and second coupling members 10539 and 10630 are coupled (see FIG. 32), the first coupling member 10539 is positioned between the pair of second coupling members 10630. The first coupling member 10539 pushes the pair of second coupling members 10630 apart from each other (i.e., a configuration in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b). can do. As a result, the game can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Detailed configurations of the first and second coupling members 10539 and 10630 will be described below.

87(a) is a front view of the first coupling member 10539 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 87(b) is a bottom view of the first coupling member 10539 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a). be. 88(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539 taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 87(a), and FIG. 88(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 87(a). 88(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539 taken along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc of FIG. 88(a).

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the first coupling member 10539 forms a decoration visible to the player from the front side, and abuts on the pair of second coupling members 10630 of the second coupling operation unit 10600. The lower surface 10539e side of the decorative portion 539c (see FIG. 87(a)) has a front view shape (see FIG. 87(a)) that is centered in the lowering direction of the first coupling member 10539 (see FIG. 32). 87(a) downward) is formed in an inverted V shape protruding.

The lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 has a step between the rear lower surface 10539e1 located on the rear side of the first coupling member 10539 (lower side in FIG. 87(b)) and the rear lower surface 10539e1. It is formed of an inclined lower surface 10539e2 that is connected and inclined downward from the connection portion having a step toward the front side of the first coupling member 10539 (the upper side in FIG. 87(b)). That is, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 recedes upward (upper in FIG. 88(a)) from the lower lower surface 10539e1 on the rear side, and then slopes downward (lower in FIG. 88(a)) as it separates from the lower lower surface 10539e1 on the rear side. Each of the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is formed by combining two flat surfaces inclined downward toward the center.

In this case, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 has an edge on the inclined tip side (lower end side, the front side of the paper surface of FIG. It is arranged at the same height position as the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 or at a height position slightly lower than the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 (downward in FIG. 87(a)). As a result, when the first coupling member 10539 is viewed from the front, the rear side lower surface 10539e1 (opening of the concave portion 10539f described later) can be made invisible to the player. At the coupling position, the inclined upper surface 10630a2 of the second coupling member 10630 abuts against the inclined lower surface 10539e2 (see FIG. 91(a)). Regulation (positioning) of relative displacement to (front side) is enabled.

A concave portion 10539f having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view is provided in the center of the rear surface side lower surface 10539e1 in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87(b)). This concave portion 10539f is a portion engaged with a convex portion 10630c protruding from the upper surface 10630a of the second connecting member 10630 at the connecting position. and a rear inner wall surface 10539f2 located on the lower side of FIG. 87(b).

The pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are formed as flat surfaces that are inclined so that the distance between them increases downward in the vertical direction of the first coupling member 10539 (lower side, lower side in FIG. 88(c)). That is, the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are formed in a shape that widens toward the traveling direction when the first coupling member 10539 is lowered toward the coupling position. The left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are brought into contact with the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 of the projections 10630c of the second connecting member 10630 at the connecting position (see FIG. 91(b)), thereby providing the first connecting member 10539 with It is possible to restrict the relative displacement of the two coupling members 10630 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction).

In addition, the rear side inner wall surface 10539f2 is formed as a flat surface that slopes toward the rear side toward the lower side (lower side, FIG. 88(a) lower side) in the elevation direction of the first coupling member 10539 . That is, the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 is inclined in the direction opposite to the inclined lower surface 10539e2, and the facing distance between the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is such that the first coupling member 10539 is lowered toward the coupling position. It is formed so as to gradually increase toward the direction of travel (lower side in FIG. 88(a)). The back inner wall surface 10539f2 is in contact with the back outer wall surface 10630c2 of the projection 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 (see FIG. 91(a)). It is possible to restrict (position) the relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 to the rear (rear side).

89(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the second coupling operation unit 10600, and (b) is a top view of the second coupling member 10630 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). 90(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member 10630 along line XCa-XCa in FIG. 89(b), and FIG. 90(b) is a cross-sectional view along line XCb-XCb in FIG. 90(a). 10630 is a cross-sectional view of two coupling members 10630. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the second coupling member 10630 is a member that forms a decoration visible to the player from the front side and that is coupled to the first coupling member 10539 at the coupling position (FIG. 32). ), the front view shape of the upper surface 10630a side of the second coupling member 10630 (see FIG. 89(a)) is formed in a shape that slopes downward toward the opposing surface 630b. That is, when the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled at the coupling position, the front view shape of the pair of second coupling members 10630 on the upper surface 10630a side is formed into a V shape with a recessed center (see FIG. 32). ).

The upper surface 10630a of the second coupling member 10630 is connected to the rear upper surface 10630a1 located on the rear side of the second coupling member 10630 (upper side in FIG. 89(b)) with a step between the rear upper surface 10630a1. and an inclined upper surface 10630a2 which is inclined downward from the connection portion having the step toward the front side of the second coupling member 10630 (lower side in FIG. 89(b)). That is, the inclined upper surface 10630a2 rises upward (the upper side in FIG. 90(a)) from the upper surface 10630a1 on the rear side, and then slopes downward (lower side in FIG. 90(a)) as it separates from the upper surface 10630a1 on the rear side. Further, each of the rear-side upper surface 10630a1 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is formed as a flat surface that is inclined downward toward the opposing surface 630b.

At the coupling position, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 of the first coupling member 10539 abuts against the inclined upper surface 10630a2 (see FIG. 91(a)). Restriction (positioning) of the relative displacement forward (front side) of the coupling member 10630 is enabled.

A convex portion 10630c having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view is projected from the rear surface side upper surface 10630a1 toward the opposing surface 630b. The protrusion 10630c is engaged with a recess 10539f formed in the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 at the coupling position. It has an outer wall surface 10630c1 and a rear outer wall surface 10630c2 located on the rear side (upper side in FIG. 89(b)).

The left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are formed as flat surfaces that incline from the rear upper surface 10630a1 toward the opposing surface 630b. That is, when the pair of second coupling members 10630 couple the opposing surfaces 630b together (see FIG. 91(b)), the pair of left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 taper toward the first coupling member 10539. formed into shape. As described above, the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the recesses 10539f of the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 abut against the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91(b)), thereby forming the first coupling member. The relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 with respect to 10539 in the left-right direction (width direction) can be restricted.

Further, the rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 is formed as a flat surface that slopes down from the top of the projection 10630a toward the rear side of the second coupling member 10630. As shown in FIG. That is, the rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 is inclined in the opposite direction to the inclined upper surface 10630a2, and the facing distance between the rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is the first coupling member 10539 side (upper side in FIG. 90(a)). It is formed so as to gradually decrease as it goes to. At the coupling position, the rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 abuts against the rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 of the recess 10539f of the first coupling member 10630 (see FIG. 91(a)). It is possible to restrict (position) the relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 to the rear (rear side).

In this case, the edge of the inclined base end side (upper end side, right side in FIG. 90(a)) of the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is convex over the entire width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 89(b)) of the second coupling member 10630. It is arranged at a height position (above in FIG. 90(a)) above the top of the portion 10630c. As a result, when the second coupling member 10630 is viewed from the front, the projection 10630c can be made invisible to the player.

Here, the projection 10630c has a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction (horizontal dimension in FIG. 90(a)) that is made smaller toward the projecting tip. That is, the outer wall surface on the front side (the side opposite to the rear outer wall surface 10630c2, the left side in FIG. 90(a)) of the convex portion 10630c is inclined in the same direction as the inclined upper surface 10630a2. Therefore, when the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 are coupled together, the projection 10630 f of the second coupling member 10630 can be easily inserted into the recess 10539 f of the first coupling member 10539 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the coupling operation of the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 will be described.

Figures 91(a) and 91(b) are cross-sectional views of the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 in the coupled position. 91(a) corresponds to FIGS. 88(a) and 90(a), and FIG. 91(b) corresponds to FIGS. 88(b) and 90(b).

As described above, the coupling of the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 is performed by bringing the pair of second coupling members 10630 close to each other by raising the link mechanism from the retracted position (see FIG. 31) and moving left and right. As shown in FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b), the first coupling members 10539 are lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 10630 arranged side by side and arranged side by side. , a first coupling member 10539 and a pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled.

In this case, in this embodiment, as described above, the recess 10539f of the first coupling member 10539 has a pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1, and the left and right outer wall surfaces abut on the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the recess 10539f. The pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 and the pair of left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are provided on the convex portions 10630c of the pair of second coupling members 10630, respectively, and the movement of the first coupling member 10539 when the first coupling member 10539 is lowered toward the coupling position. Since the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the concave portion 10539f are formed to be inclined toward the direction (downward in FIG. 91(b)), the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the convex portion 10630c are aligned with the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 of the convex portion 10630c in the left and right direction (width direction, FIG. 91B). 91(b) left-right direction) By being abutted from both sides, the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be displaced in a direction to approach each other (a direction in which the opposing surfaces 630b abut against each other). That is, the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be coupled while reliably suppressing the formation of a gap between them (between the opposing surfaces 630a).

As described above, the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 is formed with the inclined lower surface 10539e2 continuing to the front surface of the first coupling member 10539, and the upper surface 10630a of the pair of second coupling members 10630 is formed with the An inclined upper surface 10630a2 is formed that continues to the front surface of the two coupling members 10630, and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 are inclined in the same direction (in this embodiment, at the same angle of inclination). In this state, as shown in FIG. 91(a), the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 can be brought into contact with each other.

Even if the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 cannot be brought into contact with each other due to dimensional tolerance or the like, the inclined surfaces face each other, so that the first coupling member 10539 And the player can recognize the front view shape so that there is no gap between the opposing second coupling members 10630 . That is, even if there is a gap between the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2, the background is not visible through the gap, and the player can visually recognize the inclined upper surface 10630a2. As a result, the presentation effect can be improved by connecting the first connecting member 10539 and the pair of second connecting members 10630 at the connecting position.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the concave portion 10539f of the first coupling member 10539 and the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 are located on the rear side of the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2. is arranged so as to be invisible when the player looks straight ahead. Therefore, when the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 10630 are displaced in the direction of approaching each other (the direction in which the opposing surfaces 630b are brought into contact with each other). It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the structural part that causes the movement.

As a result, when the first coupling member 10539 is coupled to the pair of second coupling members 10630, the coupling operation is performed in a manner different from the player's expectation (that is, the front view shape of the lower surface 10539e side of the first coupling member 10539). are formed into a protruding shape, and the front view shape of the upper surface 10630a side of the pair of second coupling members 10630 is formed into a concave shape, so that the first coupling member 10539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 10630, When a player recalls a mode in which such a first coupling member 10539 pushes and spreads the pair of second coupling members 10630 in a direction away from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b), the pair of (mode in which the connecting member 10630 is connected without a gap) can be easily performed, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Note that when the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a are entirely flush with each other like the first coupling member 539 and the second coupling member 630 in the first embodiment, the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 (recesses 1039f) and the left and right It is impossible to make the outer wall surface 10630f1 (convex portion 10630f) invisible to the player when viewed from the front. 88(a) and FIG. 90(a)) (that is, the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 (recesses 1039f) and left and right The outer wall surface 10630f1 (the convex portion 10630f) can be made invisible to the player when viewed from the front).

A rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 is formed in the concave portion 10539f of the first coupling member 10539, and a rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 that abuts against the rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91(a)) is the second joint member 10539f. The rear inner wall surface 10539f2 and the rear outer wall surface 10630c2 formed on the convex portion 10630c of the coupling member 10630 are inclined in different directions with respect to the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2. The direction of positioning of the second coupling member 10630 (the direction of restricting the relative displacement) is determined by the contact direction of the rear inner wall surface 10539f2 and the rear outer wall surface 10630c2 and the contact direction of the rear inner wall surface 10539f2 and the rear outer wall surface 10630c2. The contact direction can be the opposite direction.

As a result, the second coupling member 10630 can be positioned with respect to the first coupling member 10539 in the front-rear direction (the direction connecting the front surface and the rear surface, the left-right direction in FIG. 91(a)). Not only is it possible to suppress the occurrence of a step in the front-rear direction by making the joining portion of the member 10630 (the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2) flush with each other, but also the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 are held at the positioning position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of relative positional displacement and rattling after being arranged at the coupling position.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment. For example, as described in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 is inserted through the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 so as to be displaceable in the axial direction. A structure in which the member 3770 is brought into contact with the inner wall surface of the third passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710) and the body portion 771 of the link member 3770 is elastically deformed (that is, the second embodiment and the third embodiment). ) may be combined.
The game machine 8 and the game machine 9 may be combined.

In each of the above embodiments, in the compound action units 400, 7400 to 9400, the positioning holes 451e, 462e of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation second gear 462 are formed as through holes through the body portions 451a, 462a. However, the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 may be bottomed recesses. Even in the case of a recess with a bottom, by inserting a jig into the recess in the same manner as in the above embodiment, positioning such as the mounting position can be performed. As a result, the rigidity of the first opening/closing gear 451 and the second rotation gear 462 can be secured, and the durability thereof can be improved.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the connecting protrusion 452d is disposed on the second opening/closing gears 452 and 7452, and the connecting grooves 481c and 7481c through which the connecting protrusion 452d is inserted are formed by the slide rack members 481 and 7481 or the slide cam member 9481. Although the case where they are arranged in the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and their arrangement positions may be interchanged. That is, the connecting projection 452d is arranged on the slide rack member 481, 7481 or the slide cam member 9481, and the connecting grooves 481c, 7481c through which the connecting projection 452d is inserted are arranged on the second opening/closing gears 452, 7452. It may be configured. In this case, the connecting grooves 481c and 7481c provided in the opening/closing second gears 452 and 7452 are projected toward the slide rack members 481 and 7481 or the slide cam member 9481 in which the connecting protrusion 452d is provided. It is preferable to form it curved in an arc shape. This is because the amount of movement of the connecting protrusion 452d accompanying the rotation of the second opening/closing gears 452 and 7452 can be increased, and the maximum amount of movement of the slide rack members 481 and 7481 or the slide cam member 9481 can be increased accordingly.

In the above seventh embodiment, the case where the connecting groove 7481c is curved in an arc shape with a constant curvature has been described, but the shape of the connecting groove 7481c is not necessarily limited to this. can be formed by As a result, for example, by varying the curvatures of the first portion and the second portion of the connecting groove 7481c, the slide rack per unit angle rotation (rotational speed) of the open/close second gear 452 can be adjusted. The sliding amount (moving speed) of the member 7481 can be made different between when the connecting protrusion 452d passes through the first portion and when it passes through the second portion. As a result, the opening/closing operation (opening/closing speed) of the operation members 491 and 492 can be varied while rotating the second opening/closing gear 452 (driving motor 430) at a constant rotational speed. Note that the connecting groove 7481c may be formed by combining a curved portion curved in an arc and a straight straight portion (a portion of the connecting groove 7481c is a straight portion extending linearly). may be).

In the first to seventh and tenth embodiments described above, in the combined motion units 400 and 7400, the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are made different so that the motion members 491 and 492 Although the case where the opening and closing operations of are non-parallel opening and closing to enhance the presentation effect has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is of course possible to open and close the members 491 and 492 in parallel. Alternatively, the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the gear portion 483c of the second pinion leg member 483 have different gear characteristics (that is, the rotation angle accompanying the slide of the slide rack member 481 is the same as that of the first pinion leg member By setting the second pinion leg member 483 to be larger than 482, the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 may be parallel opening and closing. In this case, the rack portion 481b of the slide rack members 481 and 7481 is provided with two different gears corresponding to the gear portions 482c and 483c, respectively.

Alternatively, in the first to eighth embodiments described above, in the compound action units 400, 7400, and 8400, the connecting hole 482d and the second connecting hole 8483e are formed in the shape of an elongated hole. The opening and closing motions of the operating members 491 and 492 may be parallel opening and closing by setting the directional dimensions as follows. That is, focusing on the operating member 491, when each of the pinion leg members 482, 483, 8483 is rotated, the pair of connecting raised portions 491a of the operating member 491 is connected to the connecting hole 493d. It is rotatably supported, and the other connecting raised portion 491a is supported rotatably and slidably in the longitudinal direction by the connecting hole 482d and the second connecting hole 8483e. In this case, the virtual line connecting the pair of raised connecting portions 491a of the operating member 491 in the state before the second opening/closing gear 452 rotates (see, for example, FIG. 26(b)) and the line after the second opening/closing gear 452 rotates. The connection hole 482d and the second connection hole 8483e are arranged so that the imaginary line connecting the pair of connection raised portions 491a of the operation member 491 in the state (for example, see FIGS. 26(a) and 26(c)) is parallel to the connection hole 482d and the second connection hole 8483e. Sets the longitudinal dimension.

In the first to seventh and tenth embodiments, in the compound action units 400 and 7400, the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 Although the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 is the same, it is not necessarily limited to this. The gear ratio and the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b of the second pinion leg member 483 may be different gear ratios. As a result, the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 can be made non-parallel to open and close, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the first to seventh and tenth embodiments described above, the cases where both the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are meshed with the rack portion 481b in the compound motion units 400 and 7400 are described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and only one of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 is meshed with the rack portion 481b, and the other is not meshed with the rack portion 481b. It may be only rotatably supported on the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 . As a result, the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 can be made non-parallel to open and close, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the compound motion units 400, 7400 to 9400, the first rotation gear 461 and the first opening/closing gear 451 are continuously rotated from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ4 as the opening/closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492. Although the operation of rotating by rotating is described as one unit, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is of course possible to divide the unit of operation within the range of rotation angles θ0 to θ4.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the first coupling operation units 500, 4500 to 6500, the case where the insertion shafts 531c are arranged side by side in two rows with three insertion shafts 531c on the back surface of the A layer base plate 531 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the number of insertion shafts 531c in each row may be two or less, or may be four or more.

In the first to third embodiments and the seventh to tenth embodiments, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the center insertion shaft of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically on the back surface of the A layer base plate 531 Although the case where the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are connected to the 531c has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. The first link member 541 and the second link member 542 may be connected to the side insertion shaft 531c. The same applies to the fourth embodiment, and the second link member 542 may be connected to the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c of the three vertically aligned insertion shafts 531c.

In the first to third embodiments and the seventh to tenth embodiments, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the support shaft 527 inserted through the pivot hole 541a and the slide hole 541c of the first link member 541 and the insertion A retaining ring E is attached to the shaft 531c or a fastening screw is fastened to prevent it from coming off, while a retaining ring E is attached to the connecting shaft 526 inserted into the connecting hole 541b or a fastening screw is fastened to prevent it from coming off. is omitted, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is sufficient that at least one of these three locations is fitted with a retaining ring E as a retainer or fastened with a fastening screw. .

In the above second and third embodiments, the passage P is formed by combining straight passages (first passage P1, second passage P2 and third passage P3) in a top view (see FIG. 65). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. Link members 2770 and 3770 are erected substantially vertically, and the amount of offset to the front side (forward) in a state where ring forming member 790 is arranged at the coupling position is at least The shape of the path P from the retracted position to the coupling position can be arbitrarily set as long as the circle forming member 790 is offset to the front side (forward) in the state in which it is arranged at the retracted position. For example, when viewed from above, only the third passage P3 may be formed as a passage curved in an arc shape. If at least the amount of offset to the front side at the coupled position is greater than the amount of offset to the front side at the retracted position, the amount of drive required to hold the elevation base body 2780 (annulus forming member 790) at the coupled position is sufficient. It is possible to achieve both suppression of the energy consumption of the motor 740 and suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required for lifting and lowering the elevation base body 2780 (annulus forming member 790) between the coupling position and the retracted position. can.

In the tenth embodiment, the convex portions 10630c of the pair of second coupling members 1630 are arranged adjacent to each other at the joint position, and the concave portions 10539f for receiving the adjacent pair of convex portions 10630c are integral concave portions. Although the case where (1 recessed portion) is recessed in the back side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are spaced apart from each other, and separate recesses (two recesses) capable of respectively receiving the pair of protrusions 10630c are recessed in the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539. good.

In the tenth embodiment, in the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539, the surface connecting the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 (hereinafter referred to as "connecting surface") extends in the vertical direction (elevating and lowering of the first coupling member 10539). Although the case in which the direction is parallel to the vertical direction in FIG. 88(a) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. In this case, the connecting surface of the first coupling member 10539 is preferably inclined in the direction opposite to the inclined lower surface 10539e2 (that is, in the same direction as the rear inner wall surface 10539f2). When the first coupling member 10539 is coupled to the second coupling member 10630, the first coupling member 10539 may move relative to the second coupling member 10630 toward the front side (front, in the figure) due to the influence of shaking due to disturbance. 91(a) left side), the connection surface of the first coupling member 10539 is brought into contact with the rising end of the inclined upper surface 10630a2 of the second coupling member 10630 (the right end in FIG. 91(a)). be able to. As a result, as the first coupling member 10539 descends with respect to the second coupling member 10630, the ascending end (corner) of the inclined upper surface 10630a2 can slide along the inclined surface. can be guided to a regular position (positioned in the front-rear direction).

In the tenth embodiment, the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 is a flat surface, and the height position in the vertical direction (lifting direction of the first coupling member 10539) is arranged at the same height position as a whole. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the height position of a portion of the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 may be arranged below the height position of the other portion. Specifically, only the portion of the lower back surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 located on the front side (front side, left side in FIG. 91(a)) of the protrusion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 is The height position thereof is arranged below (lower in FIG. 91(a)) than the portion located on the rear side (rear side, right side in FIG. 91(a)) of the convex portion 10630c. As a result, when the first coupling member 10539 is lowered with respect to the second coupling member 10630, the portion of the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 whose height position is arranged downward (the front side of the convex portion 10630c (see FIG. 91 ( The timing at which the outer wall surface of the convex portion 10630c (the outer wall surface opposite to the rear side outer wall surface 10630c2, the left side of FIG. The rear surface side (the part located on the right side of FIG. 91(a)) can come into contact with the outer wall surface of the projection 10630c (the rear outer wall surface 10630c2). can achieve a good bond.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

a moving member movably formed between a first position and a second position; driving means for generating driving force for moving the moving member; and driving force generated by the driving means for driving the moving member. , wherein the transmission means transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and transmits the driving force from the driving means to the moving member. At least when the movement of the moving member from the first position to the second position is started, the transmitting state is formed after the blocking state is formed. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that:

According to the game machine A1, when the movement of the moving member from the first position to the second position is started, the transmitting state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmitting means. It is possible to suppress the driving force required for the driving means to start movement, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the driving means.

That is, when the moving member at the first position starts to move to the second position, it moves a stationary object. Since it is necessary to act on such a moving member, the driving force required for the driving means is increased. As a result, an increase in size of the driving means has been caused (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). On the other hand, after the movement of the moving member is started, inertia works to maintain the moving state of the moving member. It is small compared to the driving force required to start. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it can be said that the driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is being used.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member from the first position to the second position is started, the transmitting state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmitting means. Even if the driving force that can be generated by the means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started. That is, by forming the cut-off state first by the transmission means, it is possible to cause the driving means to generate a driving force in a no-load state, and to give momentum (inertial force) to the driving state of the driving means. . After that, the transmission means forms a transmission state (switches from the cut-off state to the transmission state), so that the driving means transfers the driving force to the moving means in a state in which the driving state is gaining momentum (a state in which the inertial force is large). can be transmitted. As a result, the movement of the moving member can be started even if the size of the drive means is reduced. In other words, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output after the movement of the moving member is started.

In the gaming machine A1, the transmission means includes a driving means side member formed at least partially or entirely with teeth to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a driving means side member which can mesh with the driving means side member. a moving member-side member having teeth formed at least partially or on the entire circumference for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the driving means-side member to the moving member, wherein at least the driving means-side member or the moving member-side member A gaming machine A2 characterized in that one side has a non-formed portion in which the teeth are non-formed and cannot be meshed with the other of the drive means-side member or the moving member-side member.

According to the gaming machine A2, since the transmission means is formed such that the driving means side member and the moving member side member can mesh with each other, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the driving means side A moving member-side member meshing with the member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the moving member through the rotation of the moving member-side member (a transmission state is formed). In this case, one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is formed with a non-toothed portion, so that the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member cannot be meshed, and the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is cut off. (a blocking state is formed).

Therefore, when the movement of the moving member from the first position to the second position is started, the member on the driving means side can be idled by first forming the cut-off state using the non-formed portion. Therefore, the driving means can be driven in a no-load state, and the driving state of the driving means can have momentum (inertial force in the driving means-side member). Thereafter, by meshing the idling driving means side member with the moving member side member (that is, forming a transmission state), the driving means starts driving the moving means in a state in which the driving state gains momentum. be able to. As a result, the movement of the moving member can be started even if the size of the drive means is reduced.

Thus, according to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the transmission means consists of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and at least one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member Since it is configured to provide a non-formed portion in which teeth are not formed, the cut-off state and transmission state depend on the relative rotational position (rotational position of the non-formed portion) between the driving means side member and the moving member side member. can be switched between That is, the configuration for achieving such state switching does not require an actuator device and can be configured only by gears, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, the teeth formed on the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member are mechanical elements used for power transmission through meshing with mating teeth. In this case, the shape of the tooth trace is not limited. For example, gear teeth illustrated below can be applied to the teeth of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. Examples of gears include spur gears, helical gears, double helical gears, bevel gears, spiral bevel gears, screw gears, crown gears, miter gears, internal gears, hypoid gears, and worm gears. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions described below.

In the game machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-formed portion, and the non-formed portion of the driving means side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member are opposed to each other, so that the A gaming machine A3 characterized in that an interrupted state is formed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has a non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the moving member side member have a non-formed portion. Since the formed portions face each other to form a cut-off state, the outer diameters of the drive means side member and the moving member side member are secured at the non-formed portions, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is increased. can be improved.

That is, when only one of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member has the non-formed portion (that is, the other of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member has teeth formed over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction). In other words, the non-formed portion must be retracted to a position where it can avoid meshing with the other teeth of the driving means-side member or the moving member-side member. Specifically, the non-formed portion needs to be set back toward the rotating shaft from the bottom of the teeth of one of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member. As a result, the retraction amount of the non-formed portion becomes large, so that the outer diameter of the non-formed portion of one of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member becomes smaller. decrease in rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A3, since each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has a non-formed portion, both these non-formed portions retreat to a position where they do not interfere with the facing non-formed portion. It's enough. Specifically, both non-formed portions can be positioned between the roots and crests of the teeth of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member, and there is no need to retreat from the roots toward the rotating shaft. As a result, the amount of retraction in the non-formed portion can be reduced, and the outer diameters of the non-formed portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is increased. can be improved.

In the game machine A3, the non-formed portion of one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. , the non-formed portion of the other of the driving means-side member or the moving member-side member is gradually spaced apart from the teeth of the other of the driving means-side member or the moving member-side member in the circumferential direction. A game machine A4 characterized in that it has a shape projecting toward the non-formation part on one side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the non-formed portion provided in each of the drive means side member and the moving member side member is equivalent to the non-formed portion in either the drive means side member or the moving member side member. One of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member is curved in an arc around the rotation axis, and the non-formed portion of the other of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member is formed by the driving means-side member or the moving member. A shape that protrudes toward a non-formed portion formed on one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member (that is, the driving means side member or the moving member side member ), avoiding interference between these two non-formed portions, enabling the formation of an interrupted state, and the driving means-side member or the moving member-side member. By increasing the outer diameter of the other non-forming portion, the rigidity of the other of the driving means side member and the moving member side member can be further increased.

In the game machine A3 or A4, the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member move the driving means at a first phase position and a second phase position different from the first phase position, respectively. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the cut-off state is formed by the non-forming portion of the side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member facing each other.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member form the cut-off state at the first phase position and the second phase position. Since the first phase position and the second phase position correspond to the first position and the second position of the moving member, movement of the moving member from the first position to the second position is started. When the movement of the moving member from the second position to the first position is started, the transmission state is formed after the disconnection state is formed, so that the drive means is in the drive state. Momentum (inertial force) can be imparted. That is, even if the driving force that can be generated by the driving means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started both when the moving member is at the first position and when it is at the second position.

A game comprising a movable member, driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmission means has a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member and a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being capable of simultaneously forming a cut-off state in which transmission of driving force to the first moving member is cut off.

According to the game machine B1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member move. be done. In this case, the transmission means can simultaneously establish a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member and a blocking state in which transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is blocked. Therefore, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means.

That is, when the movement of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by one driving means, the conventional product has two driving states, namely, a state in which the driving means generates driving force and a state in which the driving force stops being generated. By forming a structure that switches the operation mode of the first moving member and the second moving member, only the operation mode in which both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop can be formed, and the first moving member cannot be stopped while moving the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member, driving means for moving the first moving member and driving means for moving the second moving member are separately provided. (See, for example, JP-A-2011-139766).

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, as described above, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means. The production cost can be reduced by reducing the number of driving means while making it possible to exhibit the presentation effect by moving and stopping the member.

In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means includes a first transmission member for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means for transmitting to the second moving member. a second transmission member, wherein the first transmission member comprises a first driving means-side member having teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the driving means formed at least partially or on the entire circumference; and the first driving means. a first moving member-side member formed to be meshable with a side member and having teeth formed at least partially or entirely around the circumference for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the first driving means-side member to the first moving member; , wherein at least one of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member is formed with no teeth so that it cannot mesh with the other of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member. A game machine B2 characterized by comprising a non-formed part that is formed.

According to the game machine B2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmission member and transmitted to the second moving member by the second transmission member, A first moving member and a second moving member are respectively moved.

In this case, the first transmission member is formed such that the first driving means-side member and the first moving member-side member can mesh with each other. The first moving member side member meshing with the first driving means side member is rotated, and through the rotation of the first moving member side member, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member, and the first moving member is moved. Further, since one of the first driving means-side member and the first moving member-side member has a non-formed portion in which teeth are not formed, the first driving means-side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member cannot be meshed, and the driving means Transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is cut off (a cut-off state is formed). That is, the formation of the blocked state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Thereby, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means.

Thus, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the first transmission member consists of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, and the first driving means side member or Since at least one of the first moving member side members is configured to have non-formed teeth and a non-formed portion, the relative rotational position between the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member (the non-formed portion It is possible to switch between a cut-off state and a transmission state according to the rotational position). That is, the configuration for achieving such state switching does not require an actuator device and can be configured only by gears, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine B2, the second transmission member transmits the driving force of the driving means to the second moving member when the transmission state of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being capable of forming a blocking state for blocking transmission of driving force to the moving member.

According to the game machine B3, the second transmission member transmits the driving force of the driving means to the second moving member when the transmission state of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. Therefore, it is possible to achieve an operation mode in which the second moving member is stopped while moving the first moving member by one driving means. In other words, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 (that is, the effect that the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means), while moving the first moving member The operation mode of stopping the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of driving means and reduce the product cost, while increasing the variation of the movement and stopping operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member to enhance the presentation effect. can.

In the game machine B3, the second transmission member includes a groove-shaped groove and a pin portion movably formed along the groove, and the groove and the pin portion extend from the driving means to the second moving member. is disposed in the transmission path of the driving force of, and the pin portion is moved along the groove portion to form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member, A game machine B4 characterized in that it is possible to form an interrupted state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is interrupted by stopping the pin portion with respect to the groove portion.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, by moving the pin portion along the groove portion, it is possible to form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member. On the other hand, by stopping the pin portion with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form an interrupted state in which transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is interrupted. When the transmission state for transmission to the member is established by the first transmission member (that is, when the first moving member is moved), transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is cut off. , while stopping the second moving member, when the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is interrupted by the first transmission member (that is, when the first moving member is stopped), the driving means can be transmitted to the second moving member to move the second moving member.

In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member having teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the driving means formed at least partially or on the entire circumference, and a second driving means side member A second driving means having teeth formed at least partially or all around the periphery for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the second driving means-side member to the second moving member so as to be able to engage with each other, and the pin portion being arranged. 2 moving member-side member and the groove portion are provided, and the pin portion moves along the groove portion as the second moving member-side member rotates, thereby approaching or approaching the second moving member-side member. a groove-arranging member that is moved in a separating direction to move the second moving member, wherein the groove of the groove-arranging member is curved in an arc shape that protrudes toward the second moving member-side member side. A gaming machine B5 characterized by:

According to the game machine B5, the second driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the second moving member side member meshed with the second driving means side member is rotated, the second driving means side member is rotated. The pin member of the moving member side member is moved along the groove portion of the groove portion providing member. As a result, the groove-arranged member moves toward or away from the second moving member-side member, and the second movable member moves along with the movement of the groove-arranged member. In this case, since the groove portion of the groove portion providing member is curved in a convex arc shape toward the second moving member side member, the amount of movement of the groove portion providing member accompanying the rotation of the second moving member side member is increased. As a result, the maximum amount of movement of the second moving member can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member having teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the driving means formed at least partially or on the entire circumference, and a second driving means side member A second moving member having at least a part or a whole circumference of teeth for transmitting driving force transmitted from the second driving means-side member to the second moving member and having the groove disposed thereon. A moving member-side member and the pin portion are disposed, and the pin portion moves along the groove portion as the second moving member-side member rotates, thereby approaching or approaching the second moving member-side member. a pin portion disposing member that is moved in a separating direction to move the second moving member, wherein the groove portion of the second moving member side member is curved in an arc shape that protrudes toward the pin portion disposing member. A gaming machine B6 characterized by:

According to the game machine B6, the second driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the second moving member side member meshed with the second driving means side member is rotated, the second driving means side member is rotated. The pin portion of the pin portion disposing member is moved along the groove portion of the moving member side member. As a result, the pin portion disposing member is moved toward or away from the second moving member side member, and the second moving member is moved along with the movement of the pin portion disposing member. In this case, since the groove portion of the second moving member-side member is curved in a convex arc shape toward the pin portion-locating member, the amount of movement of the pin portion-locating member accompanying the rotation of the second moving member-side member is is increased, the maximum amount of movement of the second moving member can be increased accordingly.

In any one of game machines B4 to B6, it is movably supported by the first moving member and interposed between the groove portion disposing member or the pin portion disposing member and the second moving member, a second transmission member for transmitting the movement of the groove-arranged member or the pin-arranged member to the second movement member to move the second movement member; A gaming machine B7 characterized by being connected to a member.

According to the game machine B7, when the groove-arranged member or the pin-arranged member is moved toward or away from the second moving member-side member, the movement of the groove-arranged member or the pin-arranged member moves to the second position. It is transmitted to the second moving member via the second transmitting member, and the second moving member is moved. In this case, in order to allow the second moving member to move in a stable posture, it is preferable that the second transmission member is connected to a plurality of locations (for example, two locations) of the second moving member. However, in the configuration in which the second transmission member is arranged at each connection point to the second moving member, the number of members for movably supporting the second transmission member on the first moving member increases (the above example Then, two members are required for supporting the second transmission member on the first moving member).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, since the second transmission member is connected to the second moving member at a plurality of locations, it is possible to reduce the number of the second transmission members while securing the number of connection locations. (For example, when securing two connection points, according to the gaming machine B7, two second transmission members are not required, and the number of second transmission members can be reduced to one). The number of members for movably supporting the second transmission member on the first moving member can be reduced. As a result, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the weight of the first moving member as a whole can be suppressed and lightened, so that the driving means for moving the first moving member can be used accordingly. The required maximum output can be reduced, and the size of the driving means can be reduced. In particular, reducing the weight of the moving member reduces the influence of inertial force when starting to move the first moving member that is in a stopped state, and contributes to downsizing of the driving means.

In the gaming machine B7, the first moving member is rotationally moved around the rotation axis of the first moving member side member, and the second transmission member is movable with respect to the first moving member. A game machine B8 characterized in that the supported position is on the rotation shaft side of the first moving member-side member rather than the center in the longitudinal direction of the first moving member.

According to the game machine B8, the second transmission member is movably supported by the first movement member, and the first movement member and the second movement member are connected via the second transmission member, so the first movement member is moved, the second moving member is also moved together with the first moving member. That is, the load of the driving means required to move the first moving member is the total weight of the first moving member and the second moving member. In this case, according to the gaming machine B8, the position where the second transmission member is movably supported with respect to the first moving member is the rotation axis of the first moving member side member relative to the longitudinal center of the first moving member. Since it is on the side, the second moving member can be brought closer to the rotating shaft side of the first moving member. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7, the position of the center of gravity in the structure in which both the first moving member and the second moving member are integrated can be brought closer to the rotation axis side of the first moving member. It is possible to reduce the influence of inertial force when starting to move the first moving member that is in a stopped state. As a result, the maximum output required for the drive means can be reduced, and the size of the drive means can be reduced.

In any one of game machines B4 to B6, the second transmission member includes a second driving means-side member having teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the driving means formed at least partly or on the entire circumference; A tooth is formed on at least a portion or the entire circumference of the drive means-side member so as to engage with the drive means-side member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the second drive means-side member to the second moving member, and the groove portion or the pin. a second moving member-side member on which one of the parts is disposed, the second driving means-side member being disposed coaxially with the first driving means-side member of the first transmission member; 2. A game machine B7 characterized in that a moving member side member is arranged coaxially with the first moving member side member of the first transmission member.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second driving means side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member are connected to the first driving means side of the first transmission member. Since they are arranged coaxially with the member and the first moving member side member, respectively, the backlash between the second driving means side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member and the first moving member side member of the first transmission member. The backlash between the driving means side member and the first moving member side member can be generated in the same direction, thereby suppressing the occurrence of deviation in performance timing between the first moving member and the second moving member. can.

In addition, in the game machine B6, the second driving means side member of the second transmission member may be fixed to the first driving means side member of the first transmission member. According to this, since the second driving means-side member of the second transmission member is fixed to the first driving means-side member of the first transmission member, both the first driving means-side member and the second driving means-side member There is no need for a member for transmitting the driving force of each driving means, and a member for transmitting to either the first driving means side member or the second driving means side member is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts or downsize the parts, thereby reducing the product cost.

Here, the fact that the first driving means-side member is fixed to the second driving means-side member means that it is sufficient if the first driving means-side member and the second driving means-side member rotate in synchronization with each other. Therefore, the first driving means-side member and the second driving means-side member may be formed separately and fixed to each other, or may be integrally formed. When they are formed separately, methods for fixing them include, for example, bonding with an adhesive, welding with ultrasonic waves, fastening with screws, and a method in which a protrusion provided on one is fitted into a recess or hole provided on the other. , a method combining these methods, and the like.

A game comprising a movable member, driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means includes a driving means-side member formed at least partially or entirely with teeth to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a driving means-side member formed so as to mesh with the driving means-side member. a moving member-side member having teeth formed at least partially or on the entire circumference for transmitting a driving force transmitted from the means-side member to the moving member, wherein the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member When the non-formed parts are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the moving member side A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a non-formed portion of a member is formed so as to be able to abut against the non-formed portion of the driving means side member.

According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the moving member side member meshing with the driving means side member is rotated, and the moving member side member rotates. , the moving member is moved. When the driving means-side member is further rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the non-formed portions of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member, the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member are engaged with each other. are considered to be incompatible. As a result, transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is cut off (a cut-off state is formed), and the moving member is stopped. That is, the moving member is arranged at the end of its range of movement. In this case, since the non-formed portion of the moving member-side member is formed so as to be able to contact the non-formed portion of the driving means-side member, the non-formed portion of the moving member-side member contacts the non-formed portion of the driving means-side member. Rotation of the moving member side member in the contact direction can be restricted. That is, movement of the moving member can be restricted.

In this case, the moving member is conventionally stopped as follows. That is, a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is provided, and when the sensor device detects the rotation of the driving means side member or the moving member side member to a predetermined rotational position, It is determined that the moving member has reached the end of the moving range, and the driving of the driving means is stopped. Alternatively, the driving amount of the driving means (for example, the number of steps when the driving means is composed of a step motor) is detected (counted), and when the driving amount reaches a predetermined amount, the moving member reaches the end of the moving range. is reached, and the driving of the driving means is stopped (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-120640). In this case, for example, the driving means may not be stopped even though the moving member has reached the end of the moving range due to the detection failure of the rotational position or the driving amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, conventional game machines have a structure in which a stopper is provided at the end of the movement range of the moving member, and the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper when the driving means is not properly stopped. However, in such a structure in which the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper, when the moving member collides with the stopper, there is a risk that the moving member and the stopper will be damaged, and that an excessive load will be applied to the driving means. There is also a possibility that it will act and cause damage to the driving means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member reaches the end of its moving range, the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member cannot mesh with each other. Since transmission of the driving force to the moving member is cut off, the moving member can be stopped even when the driving force of the driving means continues to be generated. Therefore, damage due to collision between the moving member and other members can be avoided. Further, even if the moving member collides with another member, the moving member is separated from the driving means and the driving means is in idle rotation, so that excessive load is not applied to the driving means. can be avoided.

In addition, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a moving member formed to be movable and driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member, and the driving force of the driving means moves the moving member within a predetermined movement range. There is a game machine that allows you to play (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640).
In this case, for example, when the end of the moving range of the moving member is set to the raised position and gravity acts on the moving member arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member moves (falls) due to the action of gravity. should be avoided. However, in the conventional game machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted by causing the driving force of the driving means to oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member) (that is, moving the moving member to the end of the moving range). holding) structure, energy consumption required to hold the moving member increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the non-formed portion of the moving member-side member is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the driving means-side member. Thus, rotation of the moving member side member (movement of the moving member) can be restricted. That is, in the game machine C1, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member and the driving means are separated, so that the moving member cannot be held at the end using the driving force of the driving means. , the abutment of the non-formed portion can be used to mechanically hold the moving member at the end of its range of motion. As a result, energy consumption required for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and are brought into contact with each other. The game machine C2 is characterized in that it is formed in a shape capable of regulating the rotation of the moving member-side member in both directions.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the engagement position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. and when they are brought into contact with each other (that is, when the moving means is arranged at the end of its moving range), the moving member side member is formed in a shape capable of restricting rotation in both directions. Compared to the case where the side member is formed in a shape that can restrict the rotation of the side member only in one direction (for example, only in the direction in which the moving member is moved by the action of gravity), the moving member reaches the end of the moving range. , the moving member can be rapidly positioned at the end of the moving range, and the moving member can be stably held at the end of the moving range. Vibration and displacement due to external force generated by a player striking or shaking the game board can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C2, the non-formed portion of the driving means side member is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member When arranged at the meshing position of the means-side member and the moving member-side member, it has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means-side member and has the same diameter as the arc of the non-formed portion of the drive means-side member. Alternatively, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is curved in an arc shape with a slightly larger diameter.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the non-formed portion of the driving means side member is curved in an arc around the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and the moving member side The non-formed portion of the member has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the driving means-side member when the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member are arranged at the meshing position. Since the non-formed portion of the moving member-side member can be brought into smooth contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means-side member, It is possible to easily bring both of them into contact with each other through surface contact. As a result, the non-formed portions are brought into contact with each other smoothly, and the impact when the moving member reaches the end of its moving range and is stopped can be moderated, and the contact pressure between the non-formed portions is reduced, It is possible to improve the durability of the driving means-side member and the moving member-side member.

In addition, since the non-formed portion of the driving means side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member are curved in concentric arcs, the moving member side member is curved regardless of the rotational position (phase) of the driving means side member. The non-formed portion can be brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the driving means-side member, so that the rotation of the moving member-side member in both directions can be restricted. That is, even if the driving side gear is further rotated after the moving member reaches the end of its movement range, the rotation of the moving member side member can be restricted in both directions, and as a result, the moving member can be held at the end of its moving range. can do.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the moving member side member has a plurality of fastened portions, and the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side gear via the plurality of fastened portions. A gaming machine C4 characterized by:

According to the game machine C4, since the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member-side member via a plurality of fastened portions, the moving member-side member and the moving member connected at a plurality of locations form one structure. can. That is, the rigidity of the moving member side member can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the moving member. That is, since the moving member-side member receives reaction force from the driving means-side member when the non-formed portion is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the driving means-side member, the rigidity for resisting the reaction force is ensured. On the other hand, if the thickness is increased, the weight will increase, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost will increase. Since the rigidity of the moving member side member is increased by being integrated with the member, there is no need to increase the thickness of the moving member side member or adopt a highly rigid material. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the moving member-side member while reducing the weight and cost of the moving member-side member.

In the gaming machine C4, the moving member-side member is disposed at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means-side member with a non-formed portion of the moving member-side member interposed therebetween. C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in the gaming machine C4, the moving member-side member is provided at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means-side member across the non-formed portion of the moving member-side member. When the non-formed portion of the member-side member is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means-side member, the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the drive means-side member can be effectively increased. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both weight reduction and cost reduction of the moving member-side member and improvement in durability of the moving member-side member.

It is more preferable that the fastened portion of the moving member gear is disposed at a position facing the rotating shaft of the driving means side member across the non-formed portion of the moving member side member. When the non-formed portion of the moving member-side member is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the driving means-side member, the reaction force received by the moving member-side member is the rotation axis of the driving means-side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member-side member. Therefore, the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the driving means side member is achieved by arranging the fastened portion at a position facing the rotation axis of the driving means side member This is because it can be exhibited further.

A gaming machine comprising a moving member rotatable about a first axis between a first position and a second position, and driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the moving member, wherein: a rotating member rotated about a second shaft by a driving force transmitted from a driving means; and a pin member disposed on the rotating member and positioned eccentrically with respect to the second shaft. The member has a groove-shaped guide groove portion that guides the pin member along the inner wall surface, and the guide groove portion is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and is formed to receive the pin member. and, at least at the first position, the pin member is received in the recess, so that the moving member is mechanically held at the first position.

According to the game machine D1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force transmitted from the driving means causes the rotating member to rotate about the second axis, and the pin member disposed on the rotating member rotates. is guided along the guide groove of the moving member. Since the pin member is positioned eccentrically from the second axis of the rotating member, the moving member moves between the first position and the second position as the pin member is guided along the inner wall surface of the guide groove. Rotated around one axis.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine comprises a first shaft, a moving member rotated about the first shaft, and driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member. There is a game machine that rotates a moving member between a first position and a second position about a first axis (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). In this case, for example, when the first position is the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member arranged at the first position from moving (lowering) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the driving force of the driving means opposes gravity (the weight of the moving member) to restrict the movement (lowering) of the moving member (that is, to hold the moving member at the first position). ) structure, energy consumption required to hold the moving member increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the pin member is received in a concave portion formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion, thereby mechanically holding the moving member at the first position. . That is, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position, so that the energy consumption of the driving means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the structure mechanically holds the moving member at the first position by receiving the pin member in the concave portion formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position only by the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. Compared to a structure in which the guide groove portion and the rotary member are held, the degree of freedom in arranging the guide groove portion and the rotating member can be increased.

In addition, the concave portion does not have to be bottomed, and may be penetrating. That is, it is sufficient to have inner wall surfaces facing each other while communicating with the guide groove portion. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions described below.

In the game machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, and the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being substantially perpendicular to the .

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is arranged in a direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, In addition, since it is arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member, even when the driving force of the driving means is released, the rotation of the moving member about the first shaft is prevented. In this case, the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member in a direction parallel to the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member. A rotation about a second axis cannot be formed. This makes it possible to more firmly hold the moving member at the first position. Therefore, for example, even if the moving member is shaken by hitting or shaking the game machine by the player, the moving member can be reliably held at the first position and moved downward in the direction of gravity ( descent) can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved in an arc around the second axis of the rotating member when the moving member is arranged at the first position. A game machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved in an arc around the second axis of the rotating member when the moving member is arranged at the first position. Therefore, after the moving member is placed at the first position, the pin member can be received in the recess while suppressing the movement of the moving member.

In any one of game machines D1 to D3, the concave portion is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove portion, and the pin member slides when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. A game machine D4 characterized in that it is recessed in the inner wall surface on the playing side.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the concave portion is the inner wall surface facing the guide groove portion, and the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. Since the pin member is recessed in the inner wall surface on the side where the pin member slides, the moving member can be moved from the second position to the first position without switching the driving direction of the driving means (the rotating direction of the rotating member), and , the recess can receive the pin member to hold the moving member in the first position.

A game machine D5 in any one of the game machines D1 to D4, wherein the concave portion is formed in an inner wall surface of the guide groove portion facing each other, the inner wall surface being closer to the first shaft.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the concave portion is formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion facing the opposite inner wall surface closer to the first axis. , the recess can be arranged in the dead space between the guide groove and the first shaft, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, by arranging the concave portion on the side of the first shaft in this way, the distance between the first shaft and the pin member can be shortened when the moving member is arranged at the first position. It is possible to reduce the force with which the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member along with the rotation about the first axis. This makes it possible to more firmly hold the moving member at the first position.

A moving member formed to be slidable, a driving means for generating a driving force for slidingly moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. The game machine further comprises a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member, and the moving member includes a plurality of slide holes inserted through the slide hole of the base member. and the transmission means is disposed on the other side of the base member, which is opposite to the one side of the base member on which the moving member is disposed, and transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member. A first member for transmitting power to a member is provided, and the first member has at least one of a plurality of protrusions of the moving member that protrude to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being connected to a protrusion.

According to the game machine E1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the first member of the transmitting means is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the displacement of the first member causes the projection of the moving member. is transmitted to As a result, the moving member is slid by moving the projecting portion of the moving member along the slide hole.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there are provided a moving member that is slidably formed, a driving means that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means. There is a game machine that includes a transmission means for transmitting to a member, transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member by the transmission means, and slides the moving member (see, for example, JP-A-2004-229885). . In this case, in order to stably slide the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of projections to be inserted through the slide holes. On the other hand, if the number of protrusions is increased, the number of parts for holding the protrusions (preventing them from coming off from the slide holes) also increases, resulting in an increase in cost. Therefore, a method for reducing costs while stabilizing the sliding movement of the moving member has been demanded.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the transmission means includes a first member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and the first member is one side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged. at least one projecting portion of a plurality of projecting portions of the moving member disposed on the other surface side of the base member opposite to the base member and projecting to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Since it is connected, at least one of the parts for holding the projecting portion can also be used as the first member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions and enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, and reduce the number of parts for holding the protrusions, thereby reducing costs.

In the game machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the first member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the drive means to the first member, and the base member is a connection formed as an opening. A hole is provided, and the connection member of the driving means and the transmission means is arranged on one side of the base member, and the connection member is connected to the first member through the connection hole of the base member. A gaming machine E2 characterized by:

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the transmission means is provided with a connection member that is connected to the first member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the drive means to the first member, and is formed as an opening. The connecting member is connected to the first member through the connecting hole of the base member, so that the connecting members of the driving means and the transmitting means are arranged on one side of the base member together with the moving member. can do. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the components on one side of the base member (that is, to suppress the arrangement of the components on the other side of the base member). Miniaturization as a whole can be achieved.

In the game machine E2, the first member of the transmission means is rotatably supported by the base member on the other side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, the transmission means has a connection member arranged on one surface side of the base member and a first member arranged on the other surface side of the base member, and these connection member and the first member are connected through the connection hole of the base member. Therefore, the driving force transmission path formed by the connection member and the first member is lengthened. Therefore, when transmitting the driving force of the driving means, the connecting member and the first member may be deformed, and the driving force may not be stably transmitted to the moving member. On the other hand, since the first member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other side of the base member, the rigidity of the base member is used to increase the rigidity of the connection member and the first member as a whole. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connecting member and the first member.

In particular, in the gaming machine E3, since the first member of the connection member and the first member is rotatably supported on the base member, compared to the case where the connection member is rotatably supported on the base member, such It is possible to shorten the distance from the supporting portion to the base member to the projecting portion of the moving member, and as a result, it is possible to stabilize the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member with fewer supporting portions.

In the gaming machine E1, the first member is connected to at least one of a plurality of protrusions of the moving member that protrudes to the other surface of the base member through a slide hole of the base member. and a rack member formed as a rack having teeth cut along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member on one side thereof, and a pinion formed as a pinion meshed with the rack member and transmitted from the driving means. and a pinion member for transmitting driving force to the rack member.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the first member is formed as a rack and pinion (a rack member and a pinion member), and the teeth of the rack member are engraved along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member. Therefore, the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the moving member as driving force in the linear direction through the first member, and as a result, the sliding movement of the moving member can be stabilized. can be planned.

In the gaming machine E4, the rack member is connected to at least two or more protrusions out of a plurality of protrusions of the moving member that protrude to the other side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. A gaming machine E5 characterized by:

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, the rack member is one of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that protrude to the other side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Since it is connected to at least two or more protrusions, at least two or more of the parts for holding the protrusions can also be used as the rack member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions and enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, and reduce the number of parts for holding the protrusions, thereby reducing costs.

It should be noted that connecting two or more protrusions out of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that slides to the first member in this way allows the driving force of the driving means to be applied to the moving member by rocking (rotating). With the first member configured to transmit, it is impossible because the movement locus of the connecting portion with the projecting portion is arc-shaped. This is possible for the first time (the movement locus of the rack member can be made into a straight line so as to correspond to the sliding movement of the moving member). , the number of parts for holding the projecting portion can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the base member includes a plurality of rows of slide holes extending along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member, and the rack members of the first member are provided in each row of the slide holes. A gaming machine E6 characterized by being connected to at least one protrusion in each.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4 or E5, the base member has a plurality of rows of slide holes extending along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to guide the plurality of projecting portions of the moving member respectively, so that the sliding movement of the moving member can be stably performed accordingly. In this case, since the rack member of the first member is connected to at least one projecting portion in each row of the slide holes, tilting of the posture of the moving member is suppressed when the moving member slides. can. In addition, the number of protrusions can be ensured to enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, and the number of parts for holding the protrusions can be reduced to reduce costs.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E6, the base member is formed in a plate shape and arranged in a posture in which the extension direction of the slide hole is a vertical direction, and the moving member moves along the slide hole of the base member. is slid in the vertical direction.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E6, the base member is formed in a plate shape and arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is vertical. Since the moving member is slid in the vertical direction along the slide hole, it is possible to stably slide the moving member by arranging the first member on the other side of the base member. That is, when the base member is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is the vertical direction, the moving member is tilted forward in a direction away from the one side of the base member due to the action of gravity. Since the base member is interposed between the moving member and the first member connected to the moving member, the forward tilting posture of the moving member is controlled by the first member as well as the part for holding the projecting portion. can also be regulated, and as a result, the moving member can be slid in a stable state.

In the game machine E7, the game machine E8 is characterized in that the first member is connected to a projecting portion positioned above at least the center of the moving member.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E7, the first member is connected to the projecting portion positioned above at least the center of the moving member, so that the one side of the base member is moved by the action of gravity. The forward tilting posture of the moving member can be effectively regulated by the first member, and as a result, the moving member can be slid in a more stable state. can be made

A game comprising a movable member, driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. The transmission means includes a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a tooth surface that meshes with the pinion is arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane, and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates. and a link member, one end of which is connected to the rack and the other end of which is connected to the moving member, and which rises or tilts as the rack moves in the horizontal direction, and when the link member rises The moving member is arranged at the raised position, and the link member is tilted so that the moving member is arranged at the lowered position. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being brought close to a plane perpendicular to the tooth surface and the moving direction of the rack.

According to the game machine F1, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the link member is displaced along with the displacement to the one side in the horizontal direction. As the link member is tilted, the moving member is moved downward toward the lower position (descended). The link member is erected as the link member is displaced to the side, and as the link member is erected, the moving member is moved upward (raised) toward the raised position.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there are provided a moving member formed to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force applied to the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member. , and the transmission means is formed to include a rack and pinion in part of the transmission path of the driving force (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-065923). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (lowering) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the driving force of the driving means opposes gravity (the weight of the moving member) to restrict the movement (lowering) of the moving member (that is, to hold the moving member at the raised position). ) structure, a large amount of energy is consumed to hold the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, in the raised position of the moving member, the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member approaches the plane orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and the moving direction of the rack. As a force component acting on the rack from the link member, generation of a force component in a direction for moving the rack in the horizontal direction can be suppressed. Thereby, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be held at the raised position, and as a result, energy consumption required for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

It should be noted that being close to a plane perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack and the moving direction of the rack (hereinafter referred to as a "reference plane") refers to the distance between the reference plane and the direction connecting one end and the other end of the link member. It means that the angle is set to at least 30 degrees or less (preferably 15 degrees or less). Therefore, the aspect in which the direction connecting one end and the other end of the link member is positioned within the reference plane is also included in the example of the gaming machine F1.

In the gaming machine F1, the transmission means includes a base member on which the pinion and the rack are rotatably and movably arranged, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member, and the link member is the link member. The base member is arranged to face each other along the movement direction of the rack, and the base member is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members and the pair of link members when the movement member is arranged at the raised position. A gaming machine F2 characterized by comprising an intervening portion formed so as to be able to abut on opposing surfaces of members.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, the moving member is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members and on the facing surfaces of the pair of link members. Since the base member has the interposed portion that is formed to be able to contact, the posture of the moving member can be stabilized at the raised position. That is, since the pair of link members are raised at the raised position, it is difficult to maintain the posture, and the posture of the moving member tends to become unstable. By doing so, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the pair of link members in the opposing direction (that is, the movement direction of the rack) by the intervening portion. As a result, the posture of the moving member can be stabilized at the raised position by maintaining the pair of link members in the upright state.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a base member is provided on which the pinion and the rack of the transmission means are rotatably and movably arranged, and the transmission means comprises at least a pair of the rack and the link member, and the link member. are arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member has a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that one end sides of the pair of link members are respectively interposed between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing walls.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member includes a pair of opposing walls extending along the movement direction of the rack and arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval. Therefore, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture. That is, a moving member is connected to the other end of the link member, and the position of the center of gravity tends to fluctuate due to the input of disturbance, making it difficult to maintain the posture (stable movement). Since the link members are arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, the displacements of the pair of link members arranged to face each other in the moving direction of the rack can be canceled out. can be maintained. On the other hand, since the pair of link members have their one ends interposed between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions, the pair of opposing wall portions move the pair of link members in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack. can be regulated. Accordingly, the attitude of the pair of link members can be maintained, and the moving member can be moved in a stable attitude.

In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member is increased in standing height as the moving member approaches the raised position.

According to the game machine F4, as the moving member approaches the raised position (that is, as the link member is erected), the standing height of the opposing wall portion is increased (that is, one end of the link member relative to the opposing wall portion Since the area facing the side becomes larger), it is possible to stabilize the movement of the moving member while improving the appearance. That is, by partially increasing the standing height of the facing wall instead of increasing it entirely, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance due to the facing wall, and the link member is erected (i.e., , it becomes more difficult to move the moving member in a stable posture), the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member by the opposing wall portion can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to move the moving member in a stable posture while suppressing deterioration of the appearance.

In this case, at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member, the portion having the raised height, is in a state where the moving member is arranged in the lowered position (that is, the link member is laid down). It is preferable to set the standing height so that it can face the other end side of the link member (the side connected to the moving member) in the state of being closed. According to this configuration, by utilizing the raised height portion for stabilizing the posture of the moving member during movement, the effect of maintaining the posture of the moving member arranged at the lowered position can be obtained at the same time. can be done.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extending member extending in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack is provided, and the moving member is slidably connected to the extending member and connected to the extending member. The moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, and the extending member is , a gaming machine F5, wherein the moving member is arranged between the link member and the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset.

According to the game machine F5, in any one of the game machines F1 to F4, an extension member that extends in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and guides the guide portion of the moving member along the extension direction is provided. In addition, the extension member is disposed between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset. It is possible to ensure smooth movement of the moving member while exerting the effect of suppressing energy consumption.

When a pair of link members are provided and an interposition portion is provided between the pair of link members facing each other, it is preferable to dispose the extension member inside the interposition portion. To reduce the size of a whole by effectively utilizing the inside of an intervening part, which is a dead space, by arranging an extension member in the central part where a pair of link members face each other to improve the guiding effect of movement of a moving member. This is because

A gaming machine F6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack. When the moving member is placed in the raised position, the weight of the moving member is also applied to the rack through the link member in the offset direction of the moving member. That is, a force component in the offset direction of the moving member can be generated as the force component acting on the rack from the link member. Therefore, the weight of the moving member can reduce the force component in the direction of moving the rack in the horizontal direction, so that the energy consumption of the driving means required to hold the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed. .

When the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, the position of the center of gravity tends to fluctuate due to the input of disturbance due to the offset. , the configuration of the game machine F3 is particularly effective.

In the game machine F6, the offset amount of the moving member can be changed according to the horizontal movement of the rack, and the amount of offset of the moving member at the raised position is at least equal to the movement at the lowered position. A gaming machine F7 characterized in that the amount of offset of a member is made larger than that of the member.

Here, if the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, a force component in the offset direction is generated when the moving member is positioned at the raised position. can be used to prevent the rack from moving horizontally due to the weight of the moving member. Therefore, the energy consumption of the driving means required for holding the moving member at the raised position can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when moving the moving member between the lowered position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction acts as resistance, and the energy consumed by the driving means required to move the moving member increases accordingly. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of the game machine F6, the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed as the rack moves in the horizontal direction, and the amount of offset of the moving member at the raised position can be changed. , at least larger than the amount of offset of the moving member at the lowered position, so that at the raised position, a force component in the offset direction is ensured to suppress horizontal movement of the rack due to the weight of the moving member. can. On the other hand, when moving the moving member between the lowered position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the resistance. As described above, it is possible to reduce the energy consumption of the driving means required to hold the moving member in the raised position and to reduce the energy consumption of the driving means required to move the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position. It is possible to achieve both.

In the gaming machine F7, a pair of opposing wall portions extending along the moving direction of the rack and opposed to each other with a predetermined interval are provided, and one end of the link member extends in the offset direction with respect to the rack. and is interposed between the pair of opposing wall portions, and the moving member is arranged at a raised position between the pair of opposing wall portions. At least the portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is placed in the lowered position is located in the offset direction from the rack relative to the portion where the one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is at the lowered position. A gaming machine F8 characterized in that the amount of separation between is increased.

According to the gaming machine F8, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a displaceable state along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and is interposed between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions. is moved in the horizontal direction, one end of the link member is guided along the space between the pair of opposing wall portions, so that the link member is raised or tilted while moving along the offset direction. can be made As a result, as the link member rises or tilts, the moving member is also moved along the offset direction, and the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed.

In this case, between the pair of opposed wall portions, at least a portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is placed at the raised position (when the link member is raised) is at least the portion where the moving member is lowered. Since the amount of separation from the rack in the offset direction is larger than the portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is placed at the position (when the link member is tilted), the offset of the moving member at the raised position can be at least greater than the amount of offset of the moving member in the lowered position. As a result, at the raised position, a force component in the offset direction can be ensured, and the energy consumption of the drive means required for holding the moving member at the raised position can be suppressed, and the moving member can be moved between the lowered position and the raised position. When moving the member, the force component (that is, resistance) in the offset direction can be reduced, and the energy consumption of the driving means required for moving the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position can be suppressed.

In particular, in the game machine F8, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state displaceable along the offset direction with respect to the rack, so that one end of the link member is guided along the space between the pair of opposing wall portions. The link member itself can be moved along the offset direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of resistance when the link member moves along the space between the pair of opposing wall portions, and as a result, the driving means required to move the link member between the raised position and the lowered position is reduced. Energy consumption can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F7, a pair of opposing wall portions extending along the moving direction of the rack and opposed to each other with a predetermined interval are provided, and one end of the link member extends in the offset direction with respect to the rack. is connected to the rack in a non-displaceable state along the . The other end side of the portion connected to the rack is interposed between the pair of opposed wall portions, and the pair of opposed wall portions At least one end of the link member is interposed between the opposed portions when the moving member is placed at the lowered position. A gaming machine F9 characterized in that the amount of separation from the rack in the offset direction is larger than the portion where the rack is located.

According to the game machine F9, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state in which it cannot be displaced along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and the other end side of the portion connected to the rack is a pair of opposing wall portions. Therefore, when the rack is moved in the horizontal direction, one end of the link member is guided along the gap between the pair of opposing wall portions, so that the link member is It can be erected or tilted while being elastically deformed along the offset direction. As a result, the movable member can be moved along the offset direction as the link member is raised or tilted, and the amount of offset of the movable member can be changed.

In this case, between the pair of opposed wall portions, at least a portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is placed at the raised position (when the link member is raised) is at least the portion where the moving member is lowered. Since the amount of separation from the rack in the offset direction is larger than the portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is placed at the position (when the link member is tilted), the offset of the moving member at the raised position can be at least greater than the amount of offset of the moving member in the lowered position. As a result, at the raised position, a force component in the offset direction can be ensured, and the energy consumption of the drive means required for holding the moving member at the raised position can be suppressed, and the moving member can be moved between the lowered position and the raised position. When moving the member, the force component (that is, resistance) in the offset direction can be reduced, and the energy consumption of the driving means required for moving the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position can be suppressed.

In particular, in the game machine F9, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state in which it cannot be displaced along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and the other end side of the portion connected to the rack is the pair of opposed wall portions. Since it is interposed between the opposed wall portions, when the link member is erected (located at the raised position), the elastically deformed link member is pressed against one of the pair of opposed wall portions. be able to. As a result, in the state in which the moving member is arranged at the raised position, in addition to the force component in the offset direction due to the offset of the moving member, the increase in resistance caused by pressing the link member against the opposing wall portion causes the rack to move. Horizontal movement due to the weight of the moving member can be suppressed. Therefore, the energy consumption of the driving means required for holding the moving member at the raised position can be reduced accordingly.

A game comprising a movable member, driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission member includes a first transmission member at least partially having teeth and to which the moving member is connected, and a second transmission member at least partially having teeth meshable with the teeth of the first transmission member. a transmission member; and a connection member that is connected to the second transmission member and transmits the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission member, and the connection member is connected to the teeth of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that teeth are formed.

According to the game machine G1, when the driving force of the drive means is transmitted to the second transmission member through the connecting member, the second transmission member is rotated, and the rotation of the second transmission member causes the teeth to mesh with each other. to the first transmission member to rotate the first transmission member. As a result, the moving member connected to the first transmission member is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. a first transmission member to which the moving member is connected; and a second transmission member that meshes with the first transmission member and transmits the driving force of the driving means to the first transmission member via the meshing. There is a gaming machine in which part of the drive means is formed by the transmission member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-110376). In this case, the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first transmission member meshed with the second transmission member is rotated, thereby moving the moving member connected to the first transmission member. It is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the moving member is connected to the first transmission member, the driving force of the drive means rotates the first transmission member and the second transmission member to move the moving member. If the moving member sways during operation, the swaying of the moving member may cause the first transmission member to be displaced, resulting in disengagement of engagement with the second transmission member. Even if it is possible to avoid disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, and the meshing area with the teeth of the second transmission member increases. As the surface pressure is reduced, the surface pressure is concentrated on a part of the tooth surface, which may cause uneven wear of the tooth and reduce the durability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, since the connecting member is formed with teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member, even if the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, The teeth of the first transmission member can mesh with teeth formed on the coupling member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Further, when the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, it is possible to secure the meshing area between the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member and the connecting member. It is possible to suppress wear and improve durability.

Note that the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not need to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed partially in the circumferential direction. The same applies to the following. Also, the same applies to other gears.

In the gaming machine G1, the connecting member includes a tooth forming portion erected along the axial direction of the second transmitting member from an axial end face of the second transmitting member and having the teeth formed thereon; and a main body portion connected to the upright end of the tooth forming portion, the surface of the tooth forming portion opposite to the side on which the teeth are formed is curved in an arc centered on the axis of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being formed as a concave curved surface.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is erected along the axial direction of the second transmission member from the axial end surface of the second transmission member, Since the surface of the transmission member on the side opposite to the side on which the teeth continuous to the teeth are formed is formed as a concave curved surface curved in an arc centering on the axis of the second transmission member, the tooth forming portion of the connection member is Even in the case of connecting to the axial end surface of the second transmission member, the area of the axial end surface of the second transmission member can be secured, and the fixing member attached to the axial end surface of the second transmission member can be made large accordingly. It can be made diameter. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from a resin material, the surface opposite to the surface on which the teeth are formed as described above is formed as a concave curved surface, so that the tooth forming portion It is possible to improve the moldability by making the thickness of the part uniform.

In the game machine G2, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is formed with the teeth over a range from the axial end face of the second transmission member to the body portion.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over the range from the axial end face of the second transmission member to the main body. It is possible to sufficiently secure the area where the first transmission member and the second transmission member are disengaged, thereby more reliably suppressing disengagement. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from a resin material, the teeth are formed over the entire tooth forming portion as described above, so that the thickness of the tooth forming portion is reduced as a whole. It is possible to improve the moldability by homogenizing it over the entire surface.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G3, a second moving member provided with the first transmission member and the second transmission member and formed to be movable, and a guide for guiding the second moving member in a linear direction a member, wherein the transmission means includes a pinion to which driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a rack that meshes with the pinion and is displaced as the pinion rotates, and the connecting member comprises , a gaming machine G4, wherein one end is connected to the rack and the other end is connected to the second transmission member.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the second moving member provided with the first transmission member and the second transmission member is provided, and the second moving member is the guide member. The transmission means comprises a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a rack that meshes with the pinion and is displaced as the pinion rotates. Since one end is connected and the other end is connected to the second transmission member, the connecting member is displaced by operating the rack and pinion with the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement of the connecting member causes the second transmission member to move. Rotation of the transmission member and linear movement of the second moving member can be performed simultaneously. That is, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member meshing with the second transmitting member, the moving member can be linearly moved together with the second moving member while rotating the moving member. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, since one member (connecting member) can be used for both the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member and the transmission to the second moving member, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. can be planned.

In the gaming machine G4, the rack has a tooth surface that meshes with the pinion and is arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane, and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates. The connecting member is guided by the guide member in the vertical direction along with the displacement in the direction. A game machine G5 characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member.

According to the game machine G5, the rack has a tooth surface that meshes with the pinion and is arranged substantially parallel to the horizontal plane, and is horizontally displaced as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member moves the rack horizontally. Since the pinion is guided by the guide member in the vertical direction as it is displaced, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is moved to one side in the horizontal direction. As the connecting member is tilted, the second moving member is moved downward (lowered) toward the lower position, while the rack is horizontally displaced to the other side by the rotation of the pinion. Then, the connecting member is erected as the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction.

In this case, when the second moving member is placed at the raised position, the connecting member is erected, making it difficult to maintain its posture, and the posture of the second moving member becomes unstable. As a result, the posture of the moving member arranged on the second moving member becomes even more unstable. Therefore, the shaking of the second moving member makes the shaking of the moving member more conspicuous, and the displacement of the first transmission member accompanying the shaking of the moving member increases. That is, in a state where the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, it is easy for the first transmission member and the second transmission member to come out of mesh.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, the connecting member has the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion that are engaged in the first transmission when the second moving member is arranged at the raised position. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member, the displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member becomes large, and the engagement between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is most likely to be disengaged. , the teeth formed in the tooth formation portion can be effectively utilized. Thereby, it is possible to effectively suppress disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member.

In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the transmission means includes the rack, a connecting member whose one end is connected to the rack, a second transmission member whose other end is connected to the connecting member, and teeth on the second transmission member. A pair of sets consisting of a first transmission member to be combined and a moving member connected to the first transmission member is provided, and one set of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is connected to the other set of the first transmission member. One set and the other set may be arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack while being meshed with the member and the second transmission member, respectively. According to this, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy between the moving member in one set and the moving member in the other set. Further, even if only the first transmission members or only the second transmission members are engaged with each other, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the moving members. By meshing with each other, the number of meshing points (engaging area) is increased, and the surface pressure on the tooth surface can be dispersed accordingly, so that durability can be improved.

a plurality of movable members; driving means for generating a driving force for respectively moving the plurality of moving members; and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the plurality of moving members. and wherein the plurality of moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, moved from the different retracted positions, and arranged at a reference position to combine the plurality of moving members. , the plurality of moving members are moved in directions approaching each other and arranged adjacent to each other at the reference position; and a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent a third moving member that abuts against the first moving member and the second moving member from directions substantially perpendicular to each other; By abutting on each of the members, a force is generated in a direction to bring the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other, and the first moving member, the second moving member and the third moving member are coupled. A gaming machine H1 characterized by being characterized by

According to the gaming machine H1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member, the second moving member and the third moving member by the transmitting means, thereby The moving members are retracted to different retracted positions and moved from the different retracted positions to be placed at the reference position.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of movably formed moving members, driving means for generating driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and driving force of the driving means are provided. transmission means for transmitting to the plurality of moving members respectively, wherein the plurality of moving members are retracted to different retracted positions and are moved from the different retracted positions to be arranged at the reference positions, whereby the plurality of moving members are combined (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-115300). In this case, if the plurality of moving members are not appropriately coupled at the reference position, the effect of coupling the plurality of moving members is impaired. However, as in the above-described conventional game machine, it is relatively easy to connect a pair of symmetrically shaped moving members facing each other, but it is difficult to connect three or more moving members.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, at the reference position, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged side by side, and the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other is substantially orthogonal. When the third moving member moved from the direction toward the first moving member and the second moving member is brought into contact with the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively, the first moving member and the second moving member are moved. Since a force is generated in the direction to bring them closer to each other, the first moving member, the second moving member and the third moving member can be properly coupled. As a result, it is possible to secure the presentation effect by combining the plurality of moving members.

In the game machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member each have a first contact portion and a second contact portion, and are brought into contact with the first contact portion and the second contact portion, respectively. The third moving member has a third abutting portion that contacts the first abutting portion and the second abutting portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. When the first moving member and the second moving member are brought into contact with each other, a force is generated in the direction to bring the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other, and the shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member when viewed from the front change the shape of the first moving member. A concave shape formed by a contact portion and a second contact portion and recessed toward a contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member, while the shape of the third moving member in a front view is The gaming machine H2 is characterized by a protruding shape formed by the third abutting portion and protruding in the center corresponding to the recessed shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member.

According to the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged side by side at the reference position, and the first contacting portion and the second contacting portion of the first moving member and the second moving member When the third contact portion of the third moving member is brought into contact, a force is generated in the direction to bring the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other, thereby causing the first moving member and the second moving member to move closer to each other. and a third moving member are coupled.

In this case, the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member (the combination of the first contact portion and the second contact portion) is a concave shape with a concave center, while the front view shape of the third moving member Since the shape (third contact portion) is a protruding shape in which the center protrudes corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, the first moving member, the second moving member and the second moving member 3. Moving the moving member from the retracted position to the reference position and connecting at the reference position can improve the performance effect.

That is, the front view shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are such that the first moving member and the second moving member arranged adjacent to each other are recessed as described above. In a mode in which the third moving member that is moved toward the shape has a protruding shape, when the third moving member is moved from the retracted position to the reference position, the third moving member protrudes between the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other. 3 The moving member enters and pushes and spreads the first moving member and the second moving member in a direction away from each other. contact portion) is brought into contact with the first moving member and the second moving member (the first contact portion and the second contact portion), thereby moving the first moving member and the second moving member toward each other. A force can be created to couple the first, second and third moving members. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the game machine H1 can be operated in a manner different from the expectations of the player, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are supported by the base member by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, respectively, and the first moving member and the second moving member move at the reference position. When arranged side by side, the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism may be arranged in a V-shape in which the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member side is narrowed with respect to the base member side. preferable. By setting the angles formed by the first contact portion, the second contact portion, and the third contact portion with respect to the angle formed by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, the first movement is performed at the reference position. This is because a force can be generated in a direction that brings the member and the second moving member closer to each other.

In the game machine H1, the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member is concave toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. The game machine H3 is characterized in that the front view shape of the moving member is a protruding shape in which the center protrudes corresponding to the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the front-view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member is a concave shape with a concave center, while the front-view shape of the third moving member is , the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. It is possible to improve the presentation effect by moving to the position and combining at the reference position.

That is, the front view shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are such that the first moving member and the second moving member arranged adjacent to each other are recessed as described above. In a mode in which the third moving member that is moved toward the shape has a protruding shape, when the third moving member is moved from the retracted position to the reference position, the third moving member protrudes between the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other. The third moving member enters and pushes and spreads the first moving member and the second moving member in a direction away from each other. By doing so, it is possible to form a force in a direction to bring the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other, thereby connecting the first moving member, the second moving member and the third moving member. As a result, the game can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H3, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first restricting portion and a second restricting portion, and a third restricting portion abuts against the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion, respectively. is provided in the third moving member, and at least one of the third restricting portion and the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion is adapted to move the third moving member toward the reference position. The first moving member and the second moving member are formed so as to be inclined toward the traveling direction side, and the third restricting portion abuts from both sides of the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion. A gaming machine H4 characterized by being displaced in a direction to approach each other.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, at least one of the third restricting portion, the first restricting portion, and the second restricting portion moves the third moving member toward the reference position. The third restricting portion abuts from both sides of the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion, so that the first moving member and the second moving member Since the members are displaced in the direction of approaching each other, the first moving member and the second moving member can be reliably displaced in the direction of approaching each other. Therefore, the structure that allows the first moving member and the second moving member to move can be simplified, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure can be increased.

In the gaming machine H4, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are arranged on the back sides of the portions forming the front view shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively, and the third restricting portion is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the third moving member.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are arranged on the back sides of the portions forming the front view shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively. In addition, since the third restricting portion is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the third moving member, the first restricting portion, the second restricting portion, and the third restricting portion are provided to the player. Visibility can be suppressed. Therefore, by setting a concave shape and a protruding shape as external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation.

In the gaming machine H4 or H5, the first moving member and the second moving member are tilted downward or tilted upward toward the front side of the first moving member and the second moving member, and the first moving member and the second moving member A first inclined surface and a second inclined surface that are connected to the front surfaces of the two moving members, respectively, are provided, and the third moving member is inclined in the same direction as the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, and the third moving member A game machine H6 characterized by comprising a third inclined surface connected to the front surface of the game machine H6 and abutted against the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface at the reference position.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4 or H5, the first moving member and the second moving member have the first inclined surface and the second moving member connected in front of the first moving member and the second moving member. each of which has an inclined surface, the third moving member has a third inclined surface which is inclined in the same direction as the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface and continues to the front surface of the third movable member; Since the surface, the second inclined surface, and the third inclined surface are in contact with each other, the contact between the inclined surfaces causes the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member to move in the front-rear direction (front and back). ) can be positioned. Furthermore, when the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are coupled at the reference position due to the contact between the inclined surfaces, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member It is possible to make the player recognize the front view shape so that there is no gap between them, and as a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by combining at the reference position.

In the game machine H6, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are arranged on the back sides of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, respectively, and the third restricting portion is located on the third inclined surface. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being arranged on the back side.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, the first regulating portion and the second regulating portion are arranged on the back side of the first slanted surface and the second slanted surface, respectively, and the third slanted surface Since the third restricting portion is disposed on the back side of the player, it is possible to prevent the first restricting portion, the second restricting portion, and the third restricting portion from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the front view shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of causing the player to move in a manner different from the expectation of the player. .

Here, the first slanted surface and the second slanted surface are formed in a slanted shape in which the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are invisible in front view, and the third restricting portion is invisible in front view. You may form a 3rd inclined surface in the inclined shape. It should be noted that making each restricting portion invisible in a front view by means of each inclined surface in this way means that in a structure in which the front of each restricting portion (the front side of each moving member) is formed as a horizontal surface, the first restricting portion And even if one of the second restricting portion and the third restricting portion is arranged invisibly on the back side of the horizontal plane, it is impossible because the other is exposed. This is possible only by forming an inclined surface in front of (the front side of each moving member). It is possible to make the back side of each inclined surface invisible in a front view). It can be reliably suppressed even during movement between positions. As a result, by combining the concave shape and the protruding shape, it is possible to further enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation.

In the game machine H7, the first moving member and the second moving member form a first positioning surface and a second positioning surface that are inclined upward or downward in a direction opposite to the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface. A third moving member is inclined upward or downward in the same direction as the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface, and is in contact with the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface at the reference position, respectively. A gaming machine H8 characterized by comprising three positioning surfaces.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects of the game machine H7, the first moving member and the second moving member have the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface, respectively, and the third moving member has the third positioning surface. At the reference position, the first positioning surface, the second positioning surface, and the third positioning surface are brought into contact with each other. Positioning with the member can be performed. In particular, the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface are inclined upward or downward in a direction opposite to the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, and the third positioning surface Since they are inclined in the same direction as the positioning surfaces, the direction of positioning by contact between these positioning surfaces is opposite to the direction of positioning by contact between the first inclined surface, the second inclined surface and the third inclined surface. can be a direction. As a result, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be positioned not only in the front-rear direction (the direction connecting the front surface and the rear surface), but also can be held in the positioning position in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third moving member from being displaced relative to the first moving member and the second moving member after being coupled at the reference position, and the occurrence of looseness.

a movable member, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member; In a game machine in which the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the transmission of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member A game machine I1 characterized by comprising a positioning means for positioning the engagement position to the predetermined phase.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. There is a gaming machine comprising a transmission means for transmission, the transmission means comprising a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member at a predetermined phase (for example, See JP 2009-125092). According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the rotation of the one rotates the other of the first transmission member and the second transmission member, The other rotation moves the moving member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the second transmission member is not meshed with the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, the movement range of the moving member is shifted. Therefore, when assembling (engaging) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to position the engagement position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase. Positioning work was complicated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since it is provided with positioning means for positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled (toothed When mating), such positioning means can be used to assemble the first transmission member and the second transmission member. That is, when positioning the engagement position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, it is possible to improve the workability of the positioning work.

In addition, as described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not need to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed partially in the circumferential direction.

The game machine I1 comprises a base member on which a first transmission member and a second transmission member are rotatably supported, and the positioning means includes a first base positioning portion and a second base positioning portion formed on the base member. and a first transmission member positioning portion and a second transmission member positioning portion respectively formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member at positions corresponding to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion A gaming machine I2 characterized by:

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the base member is formed with the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion, and the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion correspond to each other. Since the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are respectively formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member at the position where the By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while aligning the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the second transmission member is in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability of the positioning work.

In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion or the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion or the second transmission member positioning portion are formed as through holes, it is possible to By inserting the jig through the hole and contacting (or inserting) the tip of the inserted jig against the other, the positioning work of positioning the second transmission member at a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member can be made easier. can be performed smoothly and accurately.

In the gaming machine I2, the base member includes a first shaft and a second shaft projecting toward the front of the base member and inserted through the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first base positioning A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I2, when the base member is provided with the first shaft and the second shaft that protrude from the front surface of the base member and are inserted through the first transmission member and the second transmission member, , the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes. When assembling the member to the base member, it is possible to perform the positioning work and the assembling work at the same time, thereby improving the workability.

That is, according to the game machine I3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted through the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion from the back surface of the base member. This allows the jig to protrude from the front surface of the base member together with the first shaft and the second shaft. As a result, at the same time as assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member into the first shaft and the second shaft from the front of the base member, the tip of the jig is inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. It is possible to carry out the positioning work of contacting (or inserting) the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion. As a result, the positioning work and the assembly work can be performed simultaneously, and workability can be improved accordingly.

In game machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member comprises a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the first transmission member positioning portions are formed as through holes at positions corresponding to each other in the pair of members. A gaming machine I4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the first transmission member is placed at a position corresponding to each other of the pair of members. Since the positioning portions are formed as through holes, the pair of gears can be positioned at the same time, thereby improving the workability of the positioning work. In addition, since the work of positioning the pair of gears can be performed using a common jig, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, since there is no need to connect the pair of gears, the pair of gears can be supported on a common shaft so as to be relatively rotatable. Note that the second transmission member may also be configured in the same manner.

In any one of the game machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member comprises a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the pair of members comprises a projection projecting from one member and a projection projecting from one member. and a recess formed in the other member for receiving, and the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in the member of the pair of members arranged on the base member side. Game machine I5.

According to the game machine I5, in any one of the game machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member consists of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and one of the pair of members is arranged on the base member side. Since the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in the second transmission member positioning portion, the member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members can be positioned at a predetermined phase by using the second transmission member positioning portion. . In this case, the pair of members can be positioned in a predetermined phase by receiving the projection of one member in the recess of the other member, and are non-rotatable relative to each other (that is, synchronously). rotatable) can be supported on a common shaft. In particular, since the pair of members are fitted together with the protruding portion being received in the concave portion, the rigidity as a whole can be increased accordingly.

Note that the recess does not need to be bottomed, and may be formed as a through hole. That is, it is sufficient that the concave portion is formed so as to receive the connecting protrusion and position the members in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) when the pair of members are coaxially stacked.

A game comprising a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of prize winning ports arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and an out port for ejecting the game balls flowing down from the plurality of winning ports without winning from the game area. In the machine, the first winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is close to the lower edge of the game area to a position that makes it impossible to pass the game ball between the lower edge of the game area, or the The out port is disposed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the out port includes a first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game region with respect to the first winning port, and the first out port. A gaming machine J1 characterized by comprising a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning port.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning holes arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and game balls that do not enter the plurality of winning holes and flow down are placed in a game area. There is a game machine with an out port for discharging from (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143268). In recent years, there has been a demand for a larger liquid crystal display device in order to enhance the presentation effect. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, the position of the winning opening must also be lowered accordingly. At some point, if the position of the winning hole is lowered too much, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the game balls to flow down below the winning hole (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). In other words, the game ball that has flowed down without winning the winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning slot, and as a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device cannot be sufficiently increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the out ports include the first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port among the plurality of winning ports, and the first out port. Since it is provided with a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning port, the first winning port is not won and it is located on one side in the width direction from the first winning port. The game ball that has flowed down can be discharged from the game area through the first out port, while the game ball that has not entered the first winning port and has flowed down to the other side in the width direction of the first winning port can be discharged from the second outlet. It can be discharged from the game area by the out port of. Thereby, there is no need to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning hole (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning hole can be lowered further (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the lower edge of the game area), so the liquid crystal display device can can be enlarged.

The gaming machine J1 includes an effect member for performing an effect associated with the winning of a game ball into a second winning hole among the plurality of winning holes, and the game board having the game area formed on the front side is light-transmissive. The effect member is arranged on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second prize winning port, and the second prize winning port and the effect member are arranged in the first prize winning port. On the other hand, the game machine J2 is arranged on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the game area.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, there is provided an effect member for performing an effect associated with the winning of the game ball into the second prize winning port among the plurality of prize winning ports, and the effect member is: Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning hole on the back side of the game board made of a light-transmissive material, it is possible for a player who visually recognizes the scene where the game ball enters the second winning hole. At the same time, the performance by the performance member can be visually recognized behind, and the performance associated with the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole can be effectively performed.

In this case, the second winning opening and the effect member are arranged on one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning hole. can be lowered, and the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased even when the effect member is provided.

In other words, disposing the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second prize-winning port interferes with the liquid crystal display device, which hinders the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the first out port and the second out port are arranged on one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port. Not only can the position of the first prize winning opening be lowered, but also the degree of freedom in the arrangement position of the first winning opening on one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area can be ensured. It is possible to secure the space for arranging the second winning hole and the effect member, and as a result, according to the game machine J2, the layout is such that the effect member is arranged on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning hole. became possible.

A gaming machine J3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J2, the second prize winning port is arranged substantially in the widthwise center of the gaming area.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2, the second prize winning port is arranged substantially in the center of the game area in the width direction. By effectively utilizing the space provided, a wider space for arranging the performance member can be secured. That is, with such a layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the production member. In addition, the second winning hole is disposed substantially in the center in the width direction of the game area, so that the downflow path of the game ball to the second winning hole can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game performance for allowing the game ball to enter the second prize winning hole, and to increase the expectation of the performance by the performance member associated with the winning of the second prize winning hole.

A game machine J2 or J3 is provided with a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board, and the second effect member is arranged at a position at least partially overlapping the effect member when viewed from the front. A gaming machine J4, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2 or J3, the second effect member arranged on the back side of the game board is provided. Since the part is arranged at a position overlapping the production member, when the game board is formed of a light-transmissive material, only the necessary part of the second production member is visible to the player, and the other parts are produced. It can be shielded from the player by the member. As a result, the second effect member does not need to be designed on the assumption that it will be viewed by the player as a whole, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

A game machine J5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable around the second winning hole.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines J2 to J4, the production member is formed in a circular shape that can rotate around the second winning hole, so that it surrounds the second winning hole. The production can be performed in the entire area, and the production effect of the production associated with the winning of the second prize opening can be enhanced.

In this case, the second winning hole must be arranged at a position where a space can be secured for the game balls to flow down both above and below, and the second winning hole must be located in the game area. Since the first prize winning port is disposed at a position on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction and below the game area, the effect member is formed in a circle centered on the second prize winning port. Thus, the space that can be secured around the second prize-winning hole can be effectively utilized to the maximum, and as a result, the area of the performance member can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

A liquid crystal display device, a plurality of prize winning ports arranged below the liquid crystal display device, an out port for ejecting game balls that do not win a prize and flow down from the plurality of winning ports from the game area, and the game area. and a partition member for partitioning the game area, wherein the partition member is a circular partial area, and the area on one side in the width direction below the liquid crystal display device is outward. A game machine K1 characterized by partitioning in a shape enlarged to a .

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning holes arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and game balls that do not enter the plurality of winning holes and flow down are placed in a game area. There is a game machine with an out port for discharging from (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143268). In recent years, there has been a demand for a larger liquid crystal display device in order to enhance the presentation effect. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, the position of the winning opening must also be lowered accordingly. At some point, if the position of the winning hole is lowered too much, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the game balls to flow down below the winning hole (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). In other words, the game ball that has flowed down without winning the winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning slot, and as a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device cannot be sufficiently increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the partitioning member has a shape in which the game area is a part of a circular area and is formed by enlarging an area on one side in the width direction below the liquid crystal display device. , the enlarged area can be used as a space for arranging the winning openings. Therefore, by arranging at least some of the plurality of winning holes in the enlarged area, the position of each winning hole can be lowered accordingly. Therefore, the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered, and as a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased.

The gaming machine K1 includes a one-side prize winning opening disposed in the area on one side of the game area in the width direction that is expanded outward, and a guide path for guiding game balls to the one-side winning opening. , the opening of the guide path is formed so as to face one side in the width direction of the game area.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the opening of the guide path that guides the game ball to the one-side winning hole is formed in a direction facing one side in the width direction of the game area. It is not necessary to secure a large space above the one-side winning opening for the game balls to flow down for winning the winning opening on the side. Therefore, the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly, and as a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased.

In addition, the expression that the opening of the guideway faces one side in the width direction means that at least part of the opening is between the vertical direction facing at least the top and the horizontal direction facing one side in the width direction perpendicular to it. It is a purpose that is sufficient if it is formed. The same applies to the following.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the other side winning opening is disposed in the area on the other side in the width direction opposite to the one side in the width direction that is expanded outward in the game area, and the other side winning opening is , is disposed close to the lower edge of the game area or in contact with the lower edge of the game area to a position where the passage of the game ball is disabled between the lower edge of the game area, and the out port is , a first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side winning port, and a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game region with respect to the other side winning port A gaming machine K3 characterized by comprising an out port of

Here, if the position of the other-side winning slot can be lowered, the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly, so that the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased. However, the area on the other side in the width direction of the game area where the other side winning opening is arranged (the area below the liquid crystal display device and on the side opposite to the one side in the width direction that is expanded outward) Since it is not expanded outward, if the position of the other-side winning opening is lowered too much, the game ball will flow down below the other-side winning opening (lower edge of the game area, for example, between the inner rail). space cannot be secured. That is, the game ball that has flowed down without winning in the other side winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the other-side winning slot, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device cannot be made sufficiently large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the out port is the first out port arranged on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side winning port. , and a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side winning port, so that the player does not win in the other side winning port and flows down to one side in the width direction from the other side winning port. The game balls that have been played can be discharged from the game area through the first outlet, while the game balls that have flowed down to the other side in the width direction of the other-side winning opening without winning in the other-side winning opening can be discharged through the second outlet. Can be discharged from the game area. Thereby, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the other side winning opening (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the other side winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position where it is impossible for game balls to pass between the lower edge of the game area), so the liquid crystal display device can be used accordingly. It can be enlarged.

The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the gaming machine K3 is provided with a guide path for guiding the game ball to the winning opening on the other side, and the opening of the guide path is formed so as to face one side in the width direction of the game area.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3, the opening of the guide path that guides the game ball to the other side winning opening is formed in a direction facing one side in the width direction of the game area. It is not necessary to secure a large space above the other side winning opening for the game balls to flow down for winning the winning opening on the side. Therefore, the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly, and as a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased. In particular, in the game machine K4, the provision of the first and second outlets allows the other-side prize-winning opening to be arranged so downward as to make it impossible for the ball to pass through the lower edge of the game area. , It is effective to direct the opening of the guide passage to face one side in the width direction of the game area, thereby not flowing downward from the bottom of the liquid crystal display device, but from one side in the width direction to the other side in the width direction A game ball flowing downward can be entered into the other-side winning opening arranged on the other side in the width direction.

In a game machine K3 or K4, a game board is provided with a second winning hole and an effect member for performing an effect associated with the winning of a game ball into the second winning hole, and the game area is formed on the front side. The effect member is made of a light-transmitting material, and is disposed at a position corresponding to the second prize winning port on the back side of the game board, and the second prize winning port and the effect member are connected to the one side winning port. and a game machine K5 which is arranged at a position shifted in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side winning opening.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3 or K4, the effect member that performs the effect accompanying the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole is the back side of the game board made of a light-transmitting material. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the second prize winning port, the player visually recognizing the scene where the game ball enters the second prize winning port can also visually recognize the performance by the performance member behind the scene at the same time. Thus, it is possible to effectively perform an effect associated with the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole.

In this case, the second winning opening and the effect member are arranged at a position (on one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction) shifted in the width direction of the game area with respect to the one side winning opening and the other side winning opening. , the position of the second prize winning opening and the production member can be lowered, and the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased even when the effect member is provided.

In other words, disposing the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second prize-winning port interferes with the liquid crystal display device, which hinders the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the one-side winning opening is disposed in the area on one side in the width direction that is expanded outward of the game area, and the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side winning opening is provided. By arranging the first out port and the second out port at displaced positions, not only can the positions of the one side winning port and the other side winning port be lowered, but also the one side winning port can be lowered. Since it is possible to secure the degree of freedom in the arrangement position of the opening and the other-side winning opening on one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to secure the space for arranging the second winning opening and the effect member accordingly. As a result, according to the game machine K5, it is possible to arrange the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning hole.

In the game machine K5, the game machine K6 is characterized in that the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable around the second prize winning port.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, since the effect member is formed in a circular shape that can rotate about the second winning hole, the effect is produced in the entire area surrounding the second winning hole. can be performed, and the performance effect of the performance associated with the winning of the second prize winning port can be enhanced.

In this case, the second winning hole must be arranged at a position where a space can be secured for the game balls to flow down both above and below, and must not be expanded outward in the game area. Since the other-side winning opening is arranged in the area, the distance between the second winning opening and the other-side winning opening tends to be relatively narrow. By being formed, the space that can be secured around the second prize winning port can be utilized as effectively as possible, and as a result, the space for the game balls to flow down and the distance between the other side winning port can be secured. , the production effect can be enhanced by enlarging the area of the production member.

In any of game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K6, A gaming machine L1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K6, A gaming machine L2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any of game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K6, The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of prize winning ports arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and game balls flowing down without being won in the plurality of prize winning ports are discharged from a game area. There is a gaming machine with an out port (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-143268).
In recent years, there has been a demand for a larger liquid crystal display device in order to enhance the presentation effect.
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, the position of the winning opening must also be lowered accordingly. At some point, if the position of the winning hole is too low, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the game balls to flow down below the winning hole. In other words, the game ball that has flowed down without winning the winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning opening, and as a result, there is a problem that the liquid crystal display device cannot be sufficiently enlarged.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical concept 1 comprises a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of prize winning ports arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and a plurality of prize winning ports that are not won and flow down. An out port for discharging game balls from the game area, and a partition member for partitioning the game area, the partition member defines the game area as a circular part of the liquid crystal A region on one side in the width direction below the display device is partitioned into a shape expanded outward.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, wherein a one-side prize winning opening disposed in the area on one side in the width direction of the game area that is expanded outward; and a guide path for guiding the game ball to the winning opening, and the opening of the guide path is formed facing one side in the width direction of the game area.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is arranged in the area on the other widthwise side opposite to the one side in the widthwise direction expanded outward of the gaming area. The other side winning opening is provided, and the other side winning opening is close to the lower edge of the game area to a position where the passage of the game ball is disabled between the lower edge of the game area or the game area The out port is disposed in contact with the lower edge of the, and the out port is a first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side winning port, and the other side winning port and a second outlet disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game area.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the partitioning member expands the game area, which is a partial area of a circular shape and which is located below the liquid crystal display device and is located on one side in the width direction, outward. Since the area is partitioned into a shape, the enlarged area can be used as a space for arranging the winning openings. Therefore, by arranging at least some of the plurality of winning holes in the enlarged area, the position of each winning hole can be lowered accordingly. Therefore, the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered, and as a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the opening of the guide path that guides the game ball to the one-side winning opening extends along one side in the width direction of the game area. Since it is formed in the facing direction, it is not necessary to secure a large space above the one-side winning opening for the game balls to flow down to win a prize to the one-side winning opening. Therefore, the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly, and as a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased.
In addition, the expression that the opening of the guideway faces one side in the width direction means that at least part of the opening is between the vertical direction facing at least the top and the horizontal direction facing one side in the width direction perpendicular to it. It is a purpose that is sufficient if it is formed. The same applies to the following.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, the liquid crystal display device can be enlarged.
Here, if the position of the other-side winning slot can be lowered, the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly, so that the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased. However, the area on the other side in the width direction of the game area where the other side winning opening is arranged (the area below the liquid crystal display device and on the side opposite to the one side in the width direction that is expanded outward) Since it is not expanded outward, if the position of the other-side winning opening is lowered too much, the game ball will flow down below the other-side winning opening (lower edge of the game area, for example, between the inner rail). space cannot be secured. That is, the game ball that has flowed down without winning in the other side winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the other-side winning slot, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device cannot be made sufficiently large.
On the other hand, according to technical concept 3, in addition to the effects of technical concept 1 or 2, the out port is the first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side prize winning port. Since it has an opening and a second out opening arranged on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side winning opening, it does not win in the other side winning opening and is on one side in the width direction from the other side winning opening. While the game ball that has flowed down can be discharged from the game area through the first out port, the game ball that has not won the other side winning port and has flowed down to the other side in the width direction of the other side winning port is the second out. It can be ejected from the play area by the mouth. Thereby, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the other side winning opening (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the other side winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position where it is impossible for game balls to pass between the lower edge of the game area), so the liquid crystal display device can be used accordingly. It can be enlarged.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board
61 inner rail (partition member)
62 outer rail (partition member)
73 outer edge member (partition member)
64 First Prize Opening (Second Prize Opening)
71 Outlet 1 (outlet)
72 Second Out Exit (Out Exit)
81 third pattern display device (liquid crystal display device)
300 rotation movement unit (production member)
410 mounting base (part of base member)
410a positioning hole (first base positioning portion)
410b positioning hole (second base positioning portion)
421 back case body (part of base member)
421a positioning hole (first base positioning part)
421b positioning hole (second base positioning part)
426 first axis
427 second axis
430 drive motor (driving means)
451 opening and closing first gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member, second drive means side member)
451d connecting protrusion (positioning means, protrusion)
451e positioning hole (positioning means, first transmission member positioning portion)
452 opening and closing second gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member, second moving member side member)
452d connection protrusion (pin part)
452e positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning portion)
461 rotation first gear (part of transmission means, drive means side member, first transmission member, second transmission member)
461a1 Cylindrical surface (a part of the non-forming part)
461d connecting hole (positioning means, recess)
462 rotation second gear (part of transmission means, moving member side member, first transmission member, second transmission member)
462a1 non-formation surface (part of non-formation part)
462d connection projection (fastened part)
462e positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning portion)
471 back arm body (part of first moving member or second moving member)
472 front arm body (part of first moving member or second moving member)
481, 7481 slide rack member (groove arrangement member)
481c connecting groove (connecting groove)
9482 cam leg member (second transmission member)
8483 second pinion leg member (second transmission member)
491 , 492 operation member (moving member, first moving member, second moving member)
510 substrate member (base member)
511 guide groove (slide hole)
522 drive motor (driving means)
524 crank gear (part of transmission means)
525 connecting rod (part of transmission means)
526 connecting shaft (part of transmission means, connecting member)
530 slide mechanism (moving member)
531c insertion shaft (projection)
539 first coupling member (part of moving member, third moving member)
539e lower surface (third contact portion, third restricting portion)
10539e2 inclined lower surface (third inclined surface)
10539f1 left and right inner wall surface (third regulation part)
10539f2 rear side inner wall surface (third positioning surface)
541 first link member (part of transmission means, first member)
4543 pinion gear (pinion member)
4544, 6544 rack (rack member)
600 second joint operation unit (second production member)
621 inner link member (part of transmission means)
622 outer link member (part of transmission means)
630 second coupling member (part of moving member, first moving member and second moving member)
Upper surface of 630a (first contact portion, second contact portion, first restricting portion, second restricting portion)
10630a2 Inclined upper surface (first inclined surface, second inclined surface)
630b facing surface (contact surface)
10630c1 Left and right outer wall surfaces (first restricting portion, second restricting portion)
10630c2 rear side outer wall surface (first positioning surface, second positioning surface)
640 drive motor (driving means)
640 second prize gate (one side prize gate)
641 aperture
650a 2nd specific winning opening (first winning opening, other side winning opening)
651 aperture
700 circular motion unit (second production member)
710 intermediate case body (part of base member)
711a front (facing wall)
713a front (facing wall)
720 rear case body (part of base member)
730 front case body (part of base member)
731a back (facing wall)
732 pillar (interposed part)
733 guide rod (extension member, part of guide member)
740 drive motor (driving means)
761 pinion gear (part of transmission means, pinion)
762 rack (part of transmission means)
770 link member (part of transmission means, connecting member)
771 body
773 protruding wall portion (part of connecting member, tooth forming portion)
774 gear part (second transmission member)
774b tooth
780 lift base body (moving member, part of second moving member)
784 guided portion (guide portion, part of guide member)
790 ring forming member (moving member)
792 gear part (first transmission member)
811 axis (1st axis)
820 arm member (moving member)
822a first groove (guide groove)
822b second groove (recess)
830 drive motor (driving means)
831 drive shaft (second shaft)
832 drive arm (rotating member)
833 projecting pin (pin member)

10 Pachinko machines (game machines )
7 40 drive motor (driving means)
761 pinion gear ( part of transmission means)
762 rack (part of transmission means )
7 71 main body (part of connecting means)
773 projecting wall (part of connecting means )
774 gear part (second transmission means)
774b teeth 780 elevating base body ( base member)
7 90 ring forming member (moving means)
792 gear part (first transmission means)
792b tooth

Claims (1)

A game comprising moving means formed movably, driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving means on the machine,
The transmission means includes first transmission means at least partially having teeth and to which the moving means is connected, and second transmission means at least partially having teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first transmission means. , a connecting means connected to the second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second transmitting means,
the coupling means is formed with teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the second transmission means ;
The connecting means has one side surface formed with the continuous teeth, and the other side surface opposite to the one side surface is formed in a concave curved shape centering on the axis of the connecting means,
The continuous tooth is formed on the entire surface in the axial direction of the connecting means,
The game machine is characterized by comprising a base member on which the first transmission means and the second transmission means are pivotally supported .

Images